JP2017143881A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine capable of preventing a player's profit from being greatly changed according to a lottery state.SOLUTION: A main control unit 41 is configured to control a game to a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that have different probabilities of winning specific winning combinations (a red-7 combination replay, a blue-7 combination replay, and a missing replay (a)), and to control the game, as specific control, to an additional state in which addition of the number of ART games can be assigned as an advantageous privilege for a player. When it is controlled to the additional game, and it has been controlled to the first game state (RT2) in starting the game, the main control unit assigns the number of ART games on the basis of a fact that the specific winning combination is won in an internal lottery based on the first game state (RT2), however, when it is controlled to the additional state and it has been controlled to the second game state (RT0 and RT1) in starting the game, assigns the number of ART games on the basis of a fact that the specific winning combination is won in the second lottery based on the first game state (RT2).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 37

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  This kind of slot machine is controlled by ART that is controlled by both AT, which is informed of the pushing order advantageous to the player, and RT, where the replay probability is higher than usual, and is also controlled by RT during ART. There has been proposed a technique in which the number of continued ARTs is increased at the time of winning a special replay that can only be won (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-160844 A

  In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, even when a punk play that is an RT end condition is won during ART, it is possible to avoid the end of RT by performing an operation according to the notified pressing order. However, if the player operates in a different pressing order from the notified pressing order, RT will end even if the number of continued ARTs remains. In this case, not only the RT is ended, but also the special replay is not drawn by the end of the RT, so the opportunity to increase the number of continued ARTs is lost, which is disadvantageous for the player. May become extremely large.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can prevent a player's profit from changing greatly in accordance with a lottery state.

In order to solve the above problems, the slot machine of the means 1 of the present invention comprises:
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable,
In the slot machine (slot machine 1) in which the variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is stopped and the display result is derived, and a winning can be generated according to the display result.
Lottery state control means capable of controlling a plurality of types of lottery states including a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT0, RT1);
Lottery means (internal lottery) for determining the lottery result with a probability corresponding to the type of lottery state;
Specific control execution means for executing specific control (additional state);
A privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege (art game number) advantageous to the player when the specific control (additional state) is being executed;
With
The first lottery state (RT2) and the second lottery state (RT0, RT1) have the same probability of determining a predetermined lottery result (small role, etc.), but the specific lottery result (replay GR21, 22) The probability of determining is different,
The privilege granting means is subjected to specific control (additional state), and the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes the specific lottery result (replay GR21, 22) in the first lottery state (RT2). Granting the benefits based on
The slot machine further comprises re-lottery means (second lottery) for determining a lottery result with a probability corresponding to the first lottery state (RT2) in the second lottery state (RT0, RT1),
The bonus granting means, when specific control (additional state) is executed and controlled to the second lottery state (RT0, RT1), the lottery result of the re-lottery means (second lottery) Based on the result of the specific lottery result (replay GR21, 22), the privilege (the number of ART games) is granted,
The re-lottery means (second lottery) enters the second lottery state (RT0, RT1) regardless of whether the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) is a predetermined lottery result (small role, etc.). If controlled, the lottery result is determined with a probability corresponding to the first lottery state (RT2).
According to this feature, the special control is executed and the privilege is given based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result in the first lottery state. Although being executed, when the second lottery state is controlled to the second lottery state having a different probability of determining the specific lottery result, the lottery result is determined with the probability corresponding to the first lottery state. Since the benefit is granted based on the result of the lottery means determined to be the specific lottery result, it is controlled to the first lottery state or to the second lottery state. It is possible to prevent the player's profit from changing greatly depending on whether or not it is.
In addition, the re-lotter means regardless of whether or not the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result that does not change the probability determined in the first lottery state or the second lottery state. Since the lottery result is determined according to the first lottery state, it is not necessary to consider the lottery result of the lottery means when making the determination by the re-lottery means in the second lottery state. Program capacity can be reduced.

The benefit advantageous to the player in the means 1 is a right that allows the player to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (winning a lottery for determining whether or not to generate an advantageous state, advantageous state The right to be notified of an operation mode advantageous to the player, the right to be controlled to a gaming state having a high expected value to which a gaming value is given, and the current gaming state are games. Benefits that are directly advantageous to the player, such as the right to be notified whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to the player, the period during which the advantageous state is controlled (the number of fixed games, the average number of games that vary depending on the termination conditions, etc.) It may be a benefit that is not directly advantageous to the player, but may be a benefit that is indirectly advantageous to the player, for example, a condition for obtaining a privilege on the Internet.
In the means 1, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have different probabilities that the specific lottery result is determined. The specific lottery result is the same in both the first lottery state and the second lottery state. It may be a lottery object, and the probability that the specific lottery result is determined may be different, or the specific lottery result is determined by only one of the first lottery state or the second lottery state being the lottery target. It is also possible to use a configuration with different probability.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1,
The re-lottery means (second lottery) is characterized in that the lottery means (internal lottery) determines a lottery result using a process common to the process used when the lottery result (internal lottery) is determined (internal lottery process). .
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the program capacity when making the determination by the re-lottery means.

The slot machine of means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2,
When the re-lottery means (second lottery) determines the lottery result, the lottery result (internal lottery) is saved in a protection area (a predetermined area of the RAM 41c). It is said.
According to this feature, the lottery result by the lottery means can be prevented from being damaged when the re-lottery means determines the lottery result.

The slot machine of means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when the player derives the display result;
Derivation control means for deriving a display result;
With
When the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes the specific lottery result (replay GR21, 22) in the first lottery state (RT2), the derivation control means is configured to operate the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R) is controlled by deriving a specific display result (red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay) when operated in a specific operation mode (right / middle / left stop order, predetermined timing). Control for deriving a display result (missing replay a, middle stage replay) other than a specific display result when operated in an operation mode other than the operation mode (stop order of right middle left, predetermined timing)
When the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes the specific lottery result (replay GR21, 22) in the first lottery state (RT2), the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are specified. When the operation mode is operated in the order of right / left stop (predetermined timing), a special display result (red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay) is derived in accordance with the deduction (art game count). ) Will be given (additional suggestion),
When the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes the specific lottery result (replay GR21, 22) in the first lottery state (RT2), the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are specified. When operated in an operation mode other than the operation mode (stop order of right middle left, predetermined timing), a mode (notification) different from when a specific display result (red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay) is derived It is notified that a privilege (the number of ART games) is granted in aspect 2),
When the lottery result of the second lottery means (second lottery) becomes the specific lottery result (replay GR21, 22) in the second lottery state (RT0, RT1), the lottery means in the first lottery state (RT2). When the lottery result of (internal lottery) becomes the specific lottery result (replay GR21, 22), the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) has a specific operation mode (stop order of right middle left, predetermined order) It is characterized in that it is informed that a privilege (the number of ART games) is granted in a common mode (notification mode 2) when operated in an operation mode other than (timing).
According to this feature, when the lottery result of the re-lotter means becomes the specific lottery result in the second lottery state, the derivation operation means when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result in the first lottery state Is operated in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode, that is, it is notified that the privilege is granted in the same mode as when the specific display result cannot be derived, so the second lottery Even when a privilege is given when the lottery result of the re-lottery means becomes the specific lottery result in the state, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player.

The slot machine of means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
Specific control ending means for ending specific control (additional state),
The first lottery state (RT2) and the second lottery state (RT0, RT1) have different probabilities that the special lottery result (promotion replay) is determined,
The specific control ending means is executing specific control (additional state), and the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes a special lottery result (promotion replay) in the first lottery state (RT2). Specific control (additional state) is terminated based on
The specific control ending means, when specific control (additional state) is executed and controlled to the second lottery state (RT0, RT1), lottery of the re-lottery means (second lottery) It is characterized in that specific control (additional state) is terminated based on the result of the special lottery result (promotion replay).
According to this feature, the specific control is executed, and the specific control is terminated based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the special lottery result in the first lottery state. Although it is being executed, if the second lottery state is controlled to be the second lottery state having a different probability of determining the special lottery result, the lottery result is determined with the probability corresponding to the first lottery state. The specific control is terminated based on the determined lottery result of the re-lotter means determined to be the special lottery result, so that it is controlled to the first lottery state or the second lottery state. It is possible to prevent the player's profit from changing greatly depending on whether or not it is.

The slot machine of means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The specific control (additional state) is a control in which notification (navigation notification) according to the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) is performed,
When the specific control (additional state) is executed, notification (navigation notification) is performed depending on whether the first lottery state (RT2) or the second lottery state (RT0, RT1). It is characterized by different lottery results.
According to this feature, when the specific control is being executed, the lottery result to be notified differs depending on whether the lottery state is the first lottery state or the second lottery state. Whether the lottery state is the first lottery state or the second lottery state can be recognized.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM and RAM which a main control part mounts. It is a figure which shows the detail of the memory map of ROM and RAM which a main control part mounts. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game program and a non-game program. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area | region and a non-game area | region. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of processing when a non-game program is called from processing based on a game program during execution of the main processing, and (b) is based on a game program during execution of the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of calling a non-game program from a process. It is a figure which shows the area | region of RAM which a main control part initializes when the 1st condition and the 2nd condition are satisfied. (A) is a timing chart showing the output timing of the medal OUT signal and the security signal that the main control unit outputs to the external output board when detecting an abnormality that does not prevent the game from progressing, and (b) is the security signal. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the output timing of. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of special combination, the symbol combination of a special combination, and a special combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical combination relevant to the symbol combination of a transfer event, and a transfer event. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is permitted by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is permitted by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several small part winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of the control regarding the transition of the control state relevant to ART which a main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of the warning period lottery which a main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the control condition of the control state of a main control part, and the control condition of the production state of a sub control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the false precursor effect which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure which shows the winning number and transmission number of the special role in the 1st internal winning command which a main control part transmits. It is a figure which shows the winning number and transmission number of the general combination and re-game combination in the 2nd internal winning command which a main control part transmits. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal winning command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the navigation number in the pushing order command which a main control part transmits. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the pushing order command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main lottery relevant process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which a main control part performs in a main lottery relevant process. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the production | presentation which the reel control which a main control part performs, and a sub control part perform, when replay GR21 and 22 wins by internal lottery in a 1st state (addition state and RT2). It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the production | presentation which the reel control which a main control part performs, and a sub control part perform, when replay GR21 and 22 wins by internal lottery in a 1st state (addition state and RT2). It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the production | presentation which the reel control which a main control part performs, and a sub control part perform, when the replay GR23 wins by internal lottery in a 1st state (addition state and RT2). It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the production | presentation which the reel control which a main control part performs, and a sub control part perform, when a promotion replay is elected by internal lottery in a 1st state (addition state and RT2). In the second state (the added state and RT other than RT2), when the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won in the second lottery, the reel control executed by the main control unit and the execution mode of the effect executed by the sub control unit are shown. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an execution mode of a reel control executed by the main control unit and an effect executed by the sub control unit when the replay GR 23 is won in the second lottery in the second state (the added state and RT other than RT2). is there. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an execution mode of a reel control executed by the main control unit and an effect executed by the sub control unit when the promotion replay is won in the second lottery in the second state (the added state and RT other than RT2). is there. It is a figure for demonstrating the distribution method of the judgment value for every lottery object combination in each game state.

  A mode for carrying out a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, a slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side of the housing 1a. And a front door 1b pivotally supported at the end.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 3, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “cherry a”, “cherry” are respectively provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “b”, “bell”, “replay a”, “replay b”, and “plum” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided at the approximate center of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4) provided in correspondence with each other, so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuous with the see-through window 3. On the other hand, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped from rotating, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a transmissive liquid crystal panel in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and the transmissive area 51b corresponding to the transmissive window 3 of the display area 51a and the transmissive window 3 are interposed. Thus, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front door 1b, there are a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). In the range, the maximum bet number among the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state (in this embodiment, 3 is set as the specified number of RT0 to RT4 described later, and 2 is set as the specified number of RBs). The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the medals, and the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medals used for setting the credit and bet number are returned) Adjusting switch 10 that is operated when the game is started, start switch 7 that is operated when the game is started, and stop switches that are operated when the rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Pitch 8L, 8C, 8R, effect switch 56 to be used in effect are respectively provided so as to be operated by the player.

  In this embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b shows a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, and the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code, information for identifying the stop order of reels by navigation notification described later, a 1BETLED 14 for informing that the betting number is set to 1, and 2 betting numbers are set. 2BETLED 15 to notify that the bet is set, 3BETLED 16 to notify that the bet number is set to 3, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted is lit, and the game by operating the start switch 7 A start valid LED 18 for notifying that the start operation is valid by lighting, wait (the previous game (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the beginning) A waiting LED 19 that lights up to indicate that it is in progress, and a replaying LED 20 that lights up to indicate that a replay game is in progress The game display section 13 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the bet amount by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided inside the 8R to notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. An effect LED 56a (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective is provided inside the effect switch 56.

  Inside the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state to be described later and a stop state to be described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value to be described later A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time while checking the set value, and a hit that controls to a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at a predetermined trigger A stop switch 36a for selecting the validity / invalidity of the stop function, automatic control for automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at a predetermined opportunity An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting validity / invalidity of the settlement function, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (described later) provided inside the housing 1a. 2) or a medal payout outlet 9 for selectively switching to one of the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion part 4, and a medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that has flowed to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector 29 having an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting insertion of a foreign object on the upstream side of the insertion medal sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  In the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. 2, the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are respectively shown. A reel unit 2 comprising detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 (see FIG. 4) for outputting an external output signal, and a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are stored. Hopper tank 34a, a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 4), and a payout sensor 34c for detecting the medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4). A hopper unit 34 and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 4) is provided for detecting that the stored medal has become full.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a function key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. In the setting change state, a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery described later, and a power source that is operated when turning on / off the power source A switch 39 is provided.

  The power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a, and the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation held by a store clerk or the like. The set key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 are operated only by a person such as a store clerk who has the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after the front door 1b is opened by key operation, only the store clerk possessing the key for operating the setting key switch 37 among the game store clerk. Operation is possible.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In this embodiment, three bets are defined as a specified number of bets in RT0 to 4 described later, and two bets are determined as a specified number of bets in RB described later. When the bet number is set, the winning line LN becomes valid. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, is used as the winning line. It has been established. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM1 are set apart from the winning line LN in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of symbols arranged in the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN, the invalid line is displayed. When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) is selected when winning line LN is aligned with any of LM1 to LM4, a symbol that constitutes a specific winning line on winning line LN is displayed. It is easy to recognize that the combination is complete.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, an invalid line LM1 and a lower stage of the reel 2L, which are set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper stage. , The lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower side There are four types of invalid lines LM3 set across straddling symbols LM3, lower stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, upper stage of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set straddling to the right. It is defined as.

  In the present embodiment, as a winning combination, a winning combination is obtained when a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry b”) determined as a winning combination in the winning line LN is prepared, and the predetermined symbol is also obtained. When the combination is aligned, any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 has a combination of symbols (for example, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”) that serves as an index that is easier to recognize than the predetermined symbol combination. The combination which can be shown as having won a prize by the combination of the symbols arranged in any of the above is included. Hereinafter, a combination of symbols that is aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 when a predetermined symbol combination is aligned with the winning line LN is referred to as a symbol combination serving as an index, and constitutes a symbol combination serving as an index. The symbol is called an index symbol.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a winning combination) is displayed on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line LN. If the game stops as a result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. .

  In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. Further, one unit of control (game control) for executing a game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

  In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, a configuration using four or more reels may be used. In the configuration using two or more reels, a winning determination may be made based on a combination of display results derived for all two or more reels. In this embodiment, the variable display device is configured by physical reels. However, the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is used. Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The symbols arranged within 5 frames including can be displayed on the winning line.

  Hereinafter, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels unless it is necessary to distinguish between them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C as a middle reel, and the reel 2R as a right reel. Further, an operation for stopping the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are generated. To be supplied. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input. Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, the left The middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R are connected, and the hopper motor 34b described above is connected via the power supply board 101. These electrical components are connected, and are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 performs processing related to the progress of the game, and at the same time, controls the respective parts of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 directly or indirectly, and becomes an oscillation signal of a predetermined frequency. A control clock generation circuit 42 for generating a control clock CCLK, a random number clock generation circuit 43 for generating a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, and a game control board 40, a switch detection circuit 44 that takes in detection signals input from switches connected directly or via the power supply board 101 and transmits them to the main control unit 41, and a motor drive signal (stepping) output from the main control unit 41. Motor drive circuit 45 for transmitting the motor phase signal) to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 that transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30; and the various displays connected to the game control board 40 with the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 When a voltage drop is detected by monitoring the voltage of the LED drive circuit 47 that transmits to the LED and the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1, a voltage drop signal indicating that is output to the main control unit 41 And a reset circuit 49 that provides a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the power supply is unstable such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

  FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a verification block 503, a specific information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, a reset / interrupt controller 506, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 41a, ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, free-run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509, interrupt controller 510 A parallel input port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decoding circuit 514.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset / interrupt controller 506 includes an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit that monitors whether the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when it is detected that the user program is executed outside the designated area. The watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a time-out signal for each set period.

  The external bus interface 501 is a bus interface having an interface function between an external bus and an internal bus of a chip constituting the main control unit 41, an address bus, a data bus, and a direction control function of each control signal. The clock circuit 502 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the control clock CCLK by two. The verification block 503 is connected to an external verification machine and has a function of performing chip verification. The unique information storage circuit 504 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the main control unit 41. The arithmetic circuit 505 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

  The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b, the variable data writing operation in which the CPU 41a writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 41c and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 41a is temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. A variable data reading operation for reading out various variable data being received, a receiving operation in which the CPU 41a receives input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the parallel input port 511, the serial communication circuit 512, etc. However, a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like is also performed.

  The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The RAM 41c provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period.

  As the free-run counter circuit 507, an 8-bit free-run counter is mounted. The random number circuits 508a and 508b are circuits that generate numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as an 8-bit random number or a 16-bit random number. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b among the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a random number for internal lottery described later. The timer circuit 509 is a 16-bit programmable timer, counts down the set timer value based on the input of the control clock CCLK, and outputs an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller when reaching 0000H. In this embodiment, the timer circuit 509 can be used to perform periodic interrupt requests and time measurement.

  The interrupt controller 510 is a circuit that controls external interrupt requests from interrupt terminals and interrupt requests from built-in peripheral circuits (for example, serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509). . The parallel input port 511 incorporates an 8-bit wide input-only port. Also, the parallel output port 513 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 4 incorporates an output-only port having an 11-bit width. The serial communication circuit 512 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in input / output with respect to the outside.

  The address decoding circuit 514 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the main control unit 41 and a chip select signal that is a decoding signal for an external device. In response to the chip select signal, the internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or the external device serving as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 41a.

  For example, when the main control unit 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the ROM 41b where no program or the like is stored, the main control section 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the RAM 41c where access is prohibited. In other words, when an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation is made, an illegal access reset is generated to disable the progress of the game. Even if an unauthorized program is stored in an area unrelated to the above, an unused area of the RAM 41c, etc., it is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being executed.

  The main control unit 41 is activated when an internal or external reset occurs. At this time, the value assigned to the ROM 41b and set in the vector table in which the start address of the interrupt process is set. Is a value indicating unused or a value indicating the area where the program etc. is actually stored, and if it is not any value, it will not start, It is possible to prevent in advance the processing that was not originally intended due to the occurrence or the like.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41. In this embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal, but via the serial communication circuit 512. A configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, that is, a configuration in which the command is transmitted as a serial signal may be employed.

  The main control unit 41 also receives detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the parallel input port 511. The main control unit 41 executes main processing that shifts in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from the parallel input port 511. Also, the main control unit 41 can execute the interrupt process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main) is executed every time a time-out occurs in the timer circuit 509, that is, every fixed time interval (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment). In addition, the main control unit 41 is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, a predetermined order is set. The interrupt to be executed with priority is set by. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process ends, the interrupt will occur when the interrupt process ends. The prohibition is automatically released and a new interrupt is generated at that time. Note that other interrupts are set to be automatically disabled during the execution of interrupt processing, and interrupt processing is not automatically canceled when interrupt processing is completed. Other interrupts may be prohibited by the program at the start, and the interrupt prohibition may be canceled by the program at the end of the interrupt process.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main process, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute a process that moves in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time taken to repeat the process repeated in accordance with the control state in the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input. In addition, presentation devices such as a liquid crystal display 51, presentation effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 are connected, and these presentation devices are controlled by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the presentation control board 90. It is driven based on this.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output control unit may determine the output pattern of the effect device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units. Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer having a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d, and a sub control unit 91 for controlling the effect, and a liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. Display control circuit 92 for performing display control, LED effect circuits 52a to e for controlling driving of the effect LED 52, reel LED 55, sound output circuit 94 for controlling sound output from the speakers 53 and 54, and power-on A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain period of time, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal inputted from the switches connected to the effect control board 90 96 and a clock device 9 for outputting time information including date information and time information The power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and, when a voltage drop is detected, an interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a, and other circuits, Is installed.

  The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing an effect in accordance with an effect control program or the like stored in the ROM 91b, and is mounted on the effect control board 90. Control each part of the control circuit directly or indirectly.

  The reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. When the power is turned on, the sub control unit 91 It starts at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power interruption detection circuit 98 has a voltage that outputs a voltage drop signal lower than the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Execute command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the input number of system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 2 ms). Also, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even when the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time. The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to the set value in a lottery that affects the advantage to the player, such as an internal lottery, a navigation stock lottery, and an extra lottery to be described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated one by one (when the set value 6 is further operated, the set value 1 is set. Return). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Note that when the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened, and the configuration shifts to the setting change state. Well, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes in a state where the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in the configuration that shifts to the setting change state on the condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 supports the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting change state. Even if the detection is not detected, it is preferable to maintain the setting change state. Thus, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting change, an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed again. This is not necessary, and the setting change operation is not complicated. Further, after the transition to the setting change state, when the setting value is determined by operating the start switch 7 and then the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened. On the condition that the setting change state is terminated, it may be configured to shift to a state in which the game can proceed. Even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is not opened in an unauthorized manner. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  It should be noted that, after the game is over, when the setting key switch 37 is turned on with no bet number set, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b has been opened. In addition, a configuration for shifting to the setting confirmation state may be adopted. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being illegally confirmed without the front door 1b being opened. In addition, in the configuration that shifts to the setting confirmation state on the condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 supports the opening of the front door 1b after the transition to the setting confirmation state. It is preferable to maintain the setting confirmation state even if the detection to be performed is not performed. Thus, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting confirmation, an operation for shifting to the setting confirmation state again is performed. This is not necessary and the setting confirmation operation is not complicated. In addition, after shifting to the setting confirmation state, when the set key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated and the set value is confirmed, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened. On the condition that the setting confirmation state is terminated, it may be configured to return to a state in which the game can proceed, and even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is not opened in an unauthorized manner. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being confirmed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interruption process (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, a power interruption process (main) for setting data for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the next return is performed. Run.

  Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state, thereby disabling the progress of the game.

  The error state shifts to a normal error state that is canceled by a reset operation (operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23) and the setting change state described above, and is canceled until a new setting value is set. Special error status with no error, the RAM abnormal error status is a special error status, and once it is controlled to the RAM abnormal error status, it shifts to the setting change status and is released until a new set value is set. It will not be done.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interruption process (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, A power interruption process (sub) for setting data for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the next return is executed.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 returns the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the data of the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the performance is not disabled.

  In addition, even when it is determined that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation, the sub control unit 91 activates when receiving a setting command (described later) indicating that the setting change state has been entered from the main control unit 41 Even when a later-described return command or setting command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has returned is not received even after a certain period of time has elapsed, the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, the execution of the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The usable area in the storage area of the RAM 41c is divided into a game RAM area, an unused area 4, and a non-game RAM area (see FIG. 7B). Further, the game RAM area is divided into a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3 and a game stack area. The special work is a work that stores data that is not initialized even if the setting value is changed, and stores software random numbers, setting values, data indicating a gaming state, and the like. The important work is a work in which data which is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end of a specific gaming state (RB, BB) is stored. The display data of the LED, the input / output data of the input port, the output port, the game time A time counter and the like are stored. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of a specific gaming state, and stores stop symbols, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like. The unused area 3 is a work that is not used by any program. The game stack area is an area in which data saved from a register of the main control unit 41 during execution of a game program to be described later is stored.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 has the data in the RAM 41c when the setting key switch 37 is ON and the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is ON. Each of the initial conditions is established when the five initialization conditions are satisfied, that is, when the setting change state is terminated, when a specific game state (RB, BB) is terminated, or when one game is terminated. Five types of initialization are performed in different areas to be initialized according to the initialization conditions.

  Initialization 0 is initialization that is performed when data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on. In initialization 0, all the usable areas are initialized. . Initialization 1 is initialization that is performed when data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup with the setting key switch 37 being ON. In the initialization 1, an area other than the special work in the game RAM area is not All areas of the game RAM area are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization that is performed after the setting change state is completed by starting with the setting key switch 37 being ON. In initialization 2, special work and game stack areas (in use) in the game RAM area are used. Areas other than) are initialized. Initialization 3 is initialization performed at the end of a specific gaming state. In initialization 3, the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) of the game RAM area are initialized. The storage area for the data indicating the set value and the game state is allocated to the special work, and when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup with the setting key switch 37 being ON, that is, the data in the RAM 41c. When the game is normal and the setting is changed, data indicating the setting value and the gaming state is held. In addition, a storage area for a timer counter, which will be described later, is allocated to an important work and is retained without being initialized at the end of the game or at the end of a specific gaming state.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when performing the above-described initialization, designates a start address and an end address as the initialization target RAM address, so that one byte from the designated start address. After overwriting the data with 0, calculate the logical sum of the 1-byte data, and if the calculation result is 0, repeat the process of moving to the next address until the specified end address is reached. Initialize the RAM area in the specified address range.

  When the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment is activated due to the occurrence of a reset, the main control unit 41 performs setting at the time of activation. In the startup setting, a status flag included in the main control unit 41 is initialized. The status flag is data that holds the state of the operation result and execution result of the instruction, and particularly includes an interrupt master permission flag for setting interrupt prohibition / permission. Since the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating prohibition of interrupt, the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupt is prohibited. Then, after setting various functions with reference to the HW parameters described later, when a reset occurs according to the program stored in the program / data area, it starts in an interrupt-disabled state and then executes first Start the initial setting process.

  In the initial setting process, the main control unit 41 first sets interrupts to be prohibited, and then determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at startup, and the setting key switch 37 is ON in startup. When it is determined that the state is in the state, the process proceeds to the setting change process, and the RAM 41c is initialized at the start of the setting change process. At this time, if the data in the RAM 41c is normal, a part of the control state (setting value, gaming state, etc.) before the change is changed after the setting change by holding the special work and initializing other areas. On the other hand, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c can be surely solved by initializing all the usable areas including the special work. It has become.

  After initialization of the RAM 41c, the interrupt is set to be permitted, the set value is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 6 every time the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and after the start switch 7 is detected ON, The setting value when the setting key switch 37 is detected ON is stored in the RAM 41c, and the setting change process is terminated.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 starts with the interrupt master permission flag indicating that the interrupt is prohibited and is disabled, and in the initial setting process after the start, Since the initial setting process is executed after the interruption is set to be prohibited, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 performs the main process which processes in steps according to progress of a game for every game unit after completion | finish of a setting change process. In the main process, the RAM 41c is initialized for each game unit, and the RAM 41c is also initialized at the end of the setting change process. After the setting change process, the main process starts from the stage before the process of initializing the RAM 41c in the main process. The initialization of the RAM 41c after the setting change process is completed and the game unit It is possible to perform initialization of the RAM 41c for each process by common processing.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by executing a game area initialization process in the setting change process and the main process. In the game area initialization process, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated by designating the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, and the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated from the start address of the initialization target RAM. By sequentially clearing the minutes area, the designated initialization target RAM area in the game RAM area is initialized.

  By specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the process of updating the specified address to the next address after setting the start address as the initial value of the specified address and clearing the data of the specified address. By repeatedly executing the designated address until the end address is reached, the area from the start address of the initialization target RAM to the end address may be initialized.

  In the non-game area initialization process of the present embodiment, the initialization target RAM is cleared by sequentially clearing the RAM area for the capacity of the initialization target RAM from the start address of the initialization target RAM (the start address of the unused area 4). The area from the start address to the end address, that is, the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area are initialized.

  By specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the process of updating the specified address to the next address after setting the start address as the initial value of the specified address and clearing the data of the specified address. By repeatedly executing the designated address until the end address is reached, the area from the start address of the initialization target RAM to the end address may be initialized.

  Further, in the non-game area initialization process of the present embodiment, by setting the start address of the unused area 4 as the start address of the initialization target RAM, all of the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area are initialized. However, the non-game area initialization process only needs to initialize at least a part of the non-game RAM area, and initializes a part of the non-game RAM area. However, a part of the non-game RAM area and the unused area 4 may be initialized.

  In this embodiment, in the game area initialization process and the non-game area initialization process, the 1-byte data stored in the specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared, and then the logic of the 1-byte data is changed. The sum is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0. If the calculation result is not 0, the processing for clearing the 1-byte data by overwriting with 0 is performed again, so that the corresponding address is obtained. Although the configuration is such that the data is cleared, a configuration in which 1-byte data stored in the specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared is also possible.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state (RT0 to RT4, RB) (in this embodiment, 3 for RT0-4 and 2 for RB) is determined. Thus, the game can be started on condition that a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set.

  In this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line is activated (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always activated. A winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “combinations” is arranged on the winning line. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

  The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c. Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  Next, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each combination described above before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7 At the time of detection). In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set as the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. And, for each combination determined according to the gaming state (RT0-4, RB), each combination determined according to the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the current gaming state, the number of bets and the set value Whether or not winning is permitted is determined according to the number of determination values.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined in accordance with the internal lottery target, the current gaming state, and the set value are sequentially assigned to the random number for internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  Then, a winning number indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the RAM 41c. The winning number is used for setting of an internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, and the like.

  When a winning combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined based on the winning number is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special role is elected, the special role winning flag indicating that the special role is elected is set in the special role storing work, and when the general role is elected, the general role is elected. The winning combination flag indicating the general role is set in the general role storing work. If no winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won, the special combination storing work and the general combination storing work are cleared.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. The main control unit 41 displays the winning number, the table index stored in the ROM 41b, and the table creation data when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Referring to this, a stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding symbols, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing in a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, if any of the winning combinations is won, when the stop operation is performed, the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. If possible, control is performed to align and stop, and the winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped without being aligned in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. When a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the maximum on the winning line when the stop operation is performed If it is possible to align and stop the winning roles in the 4-frame pull-in range, control will be performed to align them and stop them, and the winning roles will be selected on the winning line within the maximum 4-frame pull-in range. If it is not possible to withdraw, if a special role that has been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames can be aligned and stopped on the winning line, it will be controlled and stopped. Control to stop without aligning in the drawing range of 4 frames will be performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. In the case where a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination. Also, when a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn, the small role is placed on the winning line. You may perform control to align.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the special role and the replaying role are won at the same time, such as when the replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the stop operation is performed. In this case, the control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer to be simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, within 4 frames, for any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop control is performed by using a stop control table that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. A configuration that performs stop control by specifying the stop position from the table and stopping the reel at the specified stop position, and searching for a stop position that can be stopped when the stop operation is performed without using the stop control table or the stop position table. A configuration that performs stop control that identifies and stops the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, and can be stopped without using the stop control table or the stop position table A configuration that uses stop control by searching and specifying the stop position together, and a configuration that performs stop control by partially changing the stop control table and stop position table. It may be.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 measures the game time, which is the time elapsed from the start of the reel rotation every time the reel starts rotating after the game starts. After a game is over, when a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and the game start operation is enabled, the reel start of the previous game is started. If the game time that has started counting from the time is more than the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), that is, if the specified time has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game, no wait is generated. At that time, the reel for the game in the game is started to rotate. On the other hand, after the end of one game, when a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game is started. If the game time that started timing from the time is less than the specified time, that is, if the specified time has not elapsed since the start of reel rotation of the previous game, a wait is generated and the reel starts rotating at that time. First, it waits until the game time that has started timing from the reel rotation start time of the previous game reaches the specified time, and starts rotating the reel when it reaches the specified time.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs control to output an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like. These external output signals are output to a hall device such as a hall computer via the information output terminal board of the game shop (hall) where the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed.

  The main control unit 41 has a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals awarded to the player due to the occurrence of winning, and the gaming state is RB (regular bonus). RB signal indicating the effect, BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB (big bonus), an ART signal indicating the start of ART described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, described later A setting change signal indicating the transition to the setting change mode, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality of the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality of the hopper unit 34 are output.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit, a parallel / serial conversion circuit, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board. Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the ART signal are directly output as pulse signals to the information providing terminal board via the relay circuit. . On the other hand, the door opening signal, setting change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel-serial conversion circuit, and information is provided. Output to the terminal board.

  Next, commands that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 sends the inserted number command, credit command, gaming state command, ART state command, internal winning command, second lottery related command, push order command, freeze command to the sub control unit 91. , ART lottery result command, reel acceleration information command, acceleration completion command, stop operation command, sliding frame number command, stop command, game end command, winning judgment command, payout start command, payout end command, standby command, stop command A plurality of types of commands including an error command, a return command, a setting command, a setting confirmation command, a door command, and an operation detection command are transmitted. These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the command type and 1-byte extension data indicating the command content, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the command type from the type data.

  The inserted number command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game. Or, when a prescribed number of bets is not set, a medal is inserted, or when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6. The inserted number command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, so that it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the inserted number command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the game state (RT0 to 4, RB) of the game, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The ART state command includes whether the game is in AT, whether it is in ART, whether it is in an added state, the number of remaining games until reaching a specified number of games, which will be described later, the number of remaining games in the precursor period, the number of remaining games in ART Is transmitted when the game is started and after the gaming state command.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts, and is transmitted after the ART state command. The internal winning command includes a first internal winning command that can specify whether or not the special combination is won, and a second internal winning command that can specify whether or not the general combination is won, After the first internal winning command is transmitted, the second internal winning command is transmitted.

  The second lottery-related command is a command that can specify the second lottery information that is information related to the second lottery, and is sent when the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts and is transmitted after the internal winning command. Is done. The second lottery information includes information that can specify whether or not the second lottery has been performed and whether or not a predetermined role has been won in the second lottery when the second lottery is performed. included.

  The push order command is a command that can specify the stop order, and is when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, after the internal winning command is transmitted, and with the stop operation of each reel Each time control is performed, it is transmitted after a stop command is transmitted. In a game in which navigation notification described later is executed, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted from the start of the game, and in a game in which navigation notification described later is not executed, an advantageous stop is performed. Until the order is determined, a push order command that cannot specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted, and after a favorable stop order is determined, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted The

  Since the game state command, the ART state command, and the internal winning command are transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts, the game is started by operating the start switch 7 by receiving these commands. Can be specified.

  The freeze command is a command that can specify whether the game is controlled to a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time, or if it is controlled to the freeze state, and when the game starts And transmitted after the internal winning command is transmitted.

  The ART lottery result command is a command that can specify whether or not an ART lottery or an additional lottery to be described later is won, the number of games of the winning ART or the number of games to be added, and when the game starts, Sent after an internal winning command is transmitted in a game in which a lottery or an extra lottery is performed.

  The reel acceleration information command is a command that can specify that the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game, and is transmitted when the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game. It is also transmitted when the reel starts to rotate with the end of the freeze state. Therefore, after the start of the freeze state is specified by the freeze command, the reel acceleration information command is received and the game progresses. Not only the fact that the rotation of the reel starts but also the end of the freeze state can be specified.

  The acceleration completion command is a command that can specify that the acceleration of the reels has been completed at the start of the game. Sent when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated at a constant speed.

  The stop operation command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel. Sent every time the accompanying stop control is performed.

  The sliding frame number command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is a left reel, a middle reel, or a right reel, and the number of sliding frames to be moved from when the corresponding reel is stopped until it stops. Each time stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel is performed, the corresponding stop operation command is transmitted after being transmitted.

  The stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is a left reel, a middle reel, or a right reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel. Stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel Is transmitted after the corresponding sliding frame number command is transmitted.

  With the stop operation command, the sliding frame number command, and the stop command, it is possible to specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and accompanying the stop operation of each reel Since it is transmitted every time stop control is performed, by receiving these commands, it is possible to specify that one of the reels has been stopped and the reel to be stopped.

  The game end command is a command that can specify that the game has ended, and is transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line LN, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, so that the player stops the third stop reel. This is when the stop switch is pressed and released, and is transmitted after the game end command is transmitted.

  Both the game end command and the winning determination command are transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and then releases the stop switch. By receiving these commands, It is possible to specify that all operations necessary to advance one game have been completed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The stand-by command is a command indicating a transition to the stand-by state. When one game is over and the bet amount is not set and the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has passed, It is transmitted after the payout of medals by the settlement (including medals used for setting the number of bets) is completed and a payout end command is transmitted.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power interruption.

  The setting command is a command indicating the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. When the setting change state is entered, a setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted and A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is transmitted. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of setting. .

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation command that indicates the start of setting confirmation is transmitted when entering the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation end is indicated when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state). Before the setting can be started) and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

  The operation detection command is a command indicating the detection state (on / off) of the operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), and is transmitted at regular intervals.

  Of these commands, commands other than the operation detection command are generated in the main process, temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the subsequent command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main).

  On the other hand, the operation detection command is generated based on the detection state of the switch every time the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) is executed 10 times, and is temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c. Then, it is transmitted in the command transmission process of the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described. When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub-control unit 91 is the earliest. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the stage, and the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc. are controlled based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Performs output control of various rendering devices. In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55, etc. Control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 stores the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among these, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and changes to the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 stores the effect pattern in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can provide a notification period in which navigation notification can be executed to notify the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. Can be controlled at an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT).

  When the main control unit 41 controls the AT, the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state, and based on the winning number of the winning navigation notification combination, the player In addition to notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player and transmitting a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player based on the winning number to the sub-control unit 91, the liquid crystal display 51, etc. The navigation effect using is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification and execute a navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in a normal state where the control is not performed by the AT.

  FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the main controller 41 includes a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 41b and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to the RAM 41c.

  The memory area of the ROM 41b includes a program / data area (0000H to 26FFH) in which programs and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area (2700H to 277FH) in which arbitrary data such as a title and version of the program can be set, and a later description. Parameters for setting the hardware table of the vector table area (2780H to 27A7H) in which the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction to be executed and the start address of the timer interrupt process (main) are set, and the internal function of the main control unit 41 HW parameter area (27A8H to 27FFH) in which is set, and an unused area (2800H to 7FFFH) where access is prohibited.

  The parameters set in the HW parameter area in the ROM 41b include the final address (HPRGEND) of the ROM area used in the program / data area, the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the final address (HRAMEND) of the RAM area for which access is prohibited.

  The memory area of the RAM 41c includes a usable area (F000H to F400H) usable as a work and an internal function register area (F4B0H to F4B0H to store a group of registers for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 41. F6FFH) and unused areas (F401H to F4AFH, F700H to FFFFH) where access is prohibited.

  FIG. 7 is an address map of the program / data area in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 and the usable area in the RAM 41c.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, It includes a use area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2. .

  The progress of the game is to advance a series of processes constituting the game. In the case of a slot machine, the stage where the game can be started by setting the number of bets is started and the reel is rotated. A step of stopping the reel, a step of deriving a display result, and a step of assigning a value such as a medal according to the display result.

  A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are allocated separately, and are allocated backward in the storage area of the ROM 41b among the game program area and the non-program area. Since the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more is allocated to the area before the non-program area, a storage area for the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game It can be easily specified according to the difference.

  The game program area and the game data area, the non-game program area and the non-game data area are allocated to continuous areas, respectively, while the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game are not related to the progress of the game. Since the game program and the non-game data area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more, the game program area and game data area related to the progress of the game, and the progress of the game Non-game programs and non-game data areas that are not involved can be easily specified according to the difference in storage areas.

  In the above description, before and after the storage area is a magnitude relationship between the address values assigned to the storage area. The smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. For this reason, the storage area allocated behind the one storage area corresponds to the storage area having an address value larger than that of the one storage area, and the storage area allocated ahead of the one storage area. This corresponds to a storage area having an address value smaller than that of one storage area.

  Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a game program is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area is allocated before the game program allocated behind the non-game program area. A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  Further, the game program area and the non-game program area may be assigned to areas adjacent to each other with the unused area 1 in between, and even in such a structure, the game program area related to the progress of the game Therefore, it is possible to easily identify a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game according to the difference in storage area.

  In addition, in the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, since 0 values are stored in all areas, a game program area and game data area, a non-game program area and non-game data, The unused areas 1 and 2 can be easily distinguished from each other, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, they can be easily found.

  It should be noted that 1 may be stored in all of the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Even in such a configuration, the game program area, the game data area, and the non-game The program area and non-game data can be easily distinguished from the unused areas 1 and 2 and can be easily detected even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2. .

  Further, as long as the game program area and the non-game program area are assigned to separate areas, the game program area and the non-game program area may be assigned to adjacent areas. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily identify a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game according to the difference in the storage areas.

  The game program area and the non-game program area both start from an address (0H) having the same lower 4 digits when the address is expressed in binary, and the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Among them, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program area not related to the progress of the game can be easily distinguished from other areas.

  In addition, both the game program area and the non-game program area not only start from an address having the same low-order 4 digit value when the address is expressed in binary, but also the low-order 1 digit value when expressed in hexadecimal. Starts from the same 0 address (0H), so that not only when the address is expressed in binary, but also when it is expressed in hexadecimal, the game program area and the non-game program area are easily distinguished from other areas. can do.

  It should be noted that both the game program area and the non-game program area start from an address having the same value in the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) regardless of whether the address is expressed in binary or hexadecimal. With this configuration, the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas. For example, the value of the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits is the same 1 The same effect can be obtained with a configuration starting from the address.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used as a work by the non-game program, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which the game program saves data, and the non-game RAM area includes a game An area where the program can be referred to, an area where the game program cannot be referred to, and a non-game stack area where the non-game program saves data are included. In the present embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas. However, the game stack area and the non-game program may be provided with a single stack area.

  The unused area 3 is an area in which neither a game program nor a non-game program is used, and is an area that is redundant with respect to a game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

  The unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither a game program nor a non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 4, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-related not related to the progress of the game The non-game RAM area used by the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage areas.

  Hereinafter, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. . Further, the unused area 1 and the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

  Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 permits access in the usable area of the RAM 41c when an access is prohibited in the program / data area of the ROM 41b. When there is an access to an area that is not set to, when there is an access to an area other than the program / data area in the ROM 41b, and when there is an access to an area other than the usable area in the RAM 41c, In other words, when an access is made to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, an illegal access reset is generated to disable the progress of the game. Therefore, an unused area of the ROM 41b or an area unrelated to the operation If an illegal program is stored in an unused area of the RAM 41c, etc. Even, it is possible to prevent illegal program from being executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and before the non-game program area behind the game program area. An unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and a group including an area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While the access to the area (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area) is collectively set to be permitted, the other areas, that is, the program / data area of the game program, game data, non-game program, Non-game data is not stored Because it is forbidden access to the area later than trick data, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Are allocated to a group of areas including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Thus, while the permission is set, even if access to other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data.

  A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area, and a program / data Out of the areas, a group of areas including the game program area (area from the game program area to the game data area), a group of areas including the non-game program (area from the non-game program area to the non-game data area) A configuration may be adopted in which access is set to permit and access to other areas is prohibited. Even in such a configuration, a game program or a non-game program is not stored in the program / data area. Access is prohibited, so the intent of unauthorized programs and unauthorized data Can be prevented without control will take place. In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Of the program / data area including the game program area (the area from the game program area to the game data area), and the area including the non-game program (from the non-game program area to the non-game area). (Access to the data area) may be set to permit, and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, a game program or non-game in the program / data area Access to an area where no program is stored Because There is inhibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  In the above description, the area where access is permitted is set in the program / data area. However, by setting the area where access is prohibited in the program / data area, the area where access is indirectly permitted is set. It is good also as a structure made.

  Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 executes the user program when the user program is executed in an area other than the designated area where the program travel is permitted, that is, in a normal operation. When the user program is executed in an unoccupied area, the IAT circuit 506a outputs an IAT generation signal to disable the progress of the game. Therefore, the unused area of the ROM 41b and the area unrelated to the operation, the unallocated area of the RAM 41c Even if an unauthorized program is stored in the use area or the like, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and before the non-game program area behind the game program area. The unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and the IAT circuit 506a permits the program running for each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While it is set as a designated area, program running in other areas, that is, areas that do not store gaming programs or non-gaming programs in the program / data area is prohibited. Control line It can be prevented been.

  In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area And the IAT circuit 506a sets each of the game program area and the non-game program area of the program / data area as a designated area that permits program running based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Thus, even if the program running in other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control due to unauthorized programs and unauthorized data.

  A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area, and an HW parameter area. Based on the parameters set in the above, a group of areas including the area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area (area from the game program area to the non-game data area) For example, the IAT circuit 506a may be set as a designated area for permitting program running at once and the program running in other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area Of which game programs and non-game programs are stored Since the program running in the absence area is prohibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data. In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, a group of areas (from the game program area) including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area. Even if the IAT circuit 506a is collectively set as a designated area for permitting program running and the program running in other areas is prohibited, the area up to the non-game data area) Unintended control It can be prevented been.

  In the above description, the program / data area is configured to set the area that permits the program travel. However, the program / data area allows the program travel to be indirectly permitted by setting the area that prohibits the program travel. A configuration may be adopted in which an area is set.

  The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program, and a subroutine that is called during execution of another program.

  Also, a CALL instruction is included as an instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to execute a program stored in the program / data area.

  The CALL instruction is an instruction for calling and executing a subroutine stored at an address designated in the main routine or the subroutine. When calling the subroutine by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the call source address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the designated address. After the subroutine is finished, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller main routine or subroutine program that executed the CALL instruction is returned.

  The CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. The normal CALL instruction is an instruction that specifies a high-order address and a low-order address to specify both the high-order address and the low-order address and calls a subroutine while the CALLV instruction specifies only the low-order address. As a result, the subroutine is called by specifying the address by the upper address preset in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and the designated lower address, and the subroutine is called with a smaller amount of data than the normal CALL instruction. It becomes possible.

  The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to a specified value by specifying a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses. Subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data than instructions and CALLV instructions. When calling the subroutine by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the caller's address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the designated value. After the subroutine is finished, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller main routine or subroutine that executed the RST instruction is returned to.

  The jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in the main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction or the RST instruction, even if the program after the movement ends, the program does not return to the movement source program.

  The main control unit 41 includes an LD command as a command for reading data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction for reading data stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine into a specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

  Among the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are particularly frequently used are stored in an area of the game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, a specific value is set in the vector table area of the ROM 41b as an upper address of a subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. The main control unit 41 specifies only the lower address using the CALLV instruction when calling a subroutine in which the upper address of the head address has a specific value, thereby specifying the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. The lower address specified as the lower address is specified, and the subroutine stored in the address including the upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, an upper address that constitutes a part of an address used when calling a subroutine that is used frequently in the game program is set in the vector table in advance as a specific value, and is based on the specific value set in the vector table. Since the address is specified, it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both an upper address and a lower address, and when calling these subroutines It is possible to reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address.

  Of the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are used frequently are stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 41b in the area where the start address is a specific value, and the CALLV instruction is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. When a specific value is set as an upper address of a subroutine to be called at the time, and the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the top address is a specific value, only the lower address is specified by using the CALLV instruction. Even if it is configured to call and execute, subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both upper and lower addresses. When calling It is possible to reduce the waste of program for specifying the address.

  In addition, the upper address used when calling with the CALLV instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

  In addition to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using a value stored in the vector table area, a value set in a specific register, etc. If a special CALL instruction that enables the storage address to be specified is used, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for designating an address when calling a subroutine. In addition, identification values having a data amount smaller than the addresses are assigned to the plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, the storage addresses of the subroutines are set in the plurality of areas, and the identification values are designated, thereby identifying the areas. Even in a configuration that uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify a storage address of a subroutine stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for designating an address when the subroutine is called. .

  In addition, among the game data stored in the ROM 41b, game data that is frequently used is stored in the game data area of the ROM 41b in an area where the head address is a specific value, and a special LD is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the data to be read by the instruction, and when the main control unit 41 calls game data in which the upper address of the top address becomes the specific value, only the lower address is specified by using a special LD instruction. Even when it is configured to read out these game data, it becomes possible to call game data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD command that reads out data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. When wasting game data, the program for specifying the address is wasted It can be reduced.

  In addition, among the non-game data stored in the ROM 41b, non-game data that is frequently used is stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b in the area where the head address is a specific value, and in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, When a specific value is set as an upper address of data read by a special LD instruction and the main control unit 41 calls non-game data whose upper address of the head address is a specific value, only the lower address is used by using a special LD instruction. Even if it is configured to read these non-game data by designating, the non-game data is called with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction that designates both the upper address and the lower address and reads data. It is possible to specify the address when reading these non-game data. It is possible to reduce the waste of lamb.

  Even in these cases, the upper address used when calling with a special LD instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

  Also, a part of the address is specified using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in a specific register, etc., and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address If the configuration uses a special LD instruction, the waste of a program for designating an address when reading data can be reduced. In addition, identification values with a data amount smaller than the addresses are assigned to the plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, the data storage addresses are set in the plurality of areas, and the identification values are designated to identify the areas. Even in a configuration using a special LD instruction that can specify the storage address of data stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data .

  The main control unit 41 is activated when a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by the WDT 506b, or the aforementioned illegal access reset occurs. At this time, the value set in the vector table area, that is, The upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) are values indicating the area where the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (in the unused vector table area) If the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating that the program is outside the area nor FFFFH, it will not start. An unintended process may be executed due to an interrupt. In advance it can be prevented.

  The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless the process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, a non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and even when the game program is called to return to the game program without executing processing based on the program, the game can be advanced. It is a program for executing processing.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the game program includes a game dedicated program included only in the game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program included in both the game program and the non-game program.

  The game dedicated program includes, for example, a game start waiting process, a main lottery related process, an internal lottery process, a reel control process, a game end setting process, an external output 1 process, an initial setting process, a power interruption process, an abnormal winning determination process, and an error. Includes processing. In the game start waiting process, after the control of one game is completed, the bet number is set by inserting medals, etc., and after the prescribed number of bets is set, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The main lottery-related process is an internal lottery process and a process for setting an extra lottery and an AT state in the extra state described later. The internal lottery process is called in the main lottery-related process and the internal lottery is performed. The reel control process is a process for starting the rotation of the reel and stopping the reel by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. The time setting process is a process for determining whether or not a winning has occurred according to the stop position of the stopped reel, and for performing medal payout, re-game setting, game state transition, etc. The external output 1 process is a process for controlling the output of the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the RT signal among the external output signals. This is a process to make the game possible when the game is turned on (back-up error confirmation, register initialization, etc.). When power interruption occurs, it can be restored to the state before power interruption. The abnormal winning determination process is a process for determining whether or not an abnormal winning in which an unacceptable combination wins has occurred, and the error processing includes various abnormalities (medal insertion abnormality, medal selector 29). Foreign object detection, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign object detection near the payout exit, RAM abnormality, set value abnormality, hopper tank 34a empty, overflow tank 35 full tank detection Abnormal prize, etc.) is a process for disabling the game when is detected. In addition, although not particularly illustrated, the game program includes processing related to the above-described AT (a lottery related to AT, control related to navigation notification, and the like).

  The common determination program in the game program includes, for example, an input determination process and a payout determination process. The insertion determination process is a process for determining whether or not the medal is normally passed by the inserted medal sensor 31, and is a process executed in a state where a medal can be inserted for setting a bet amount. The payout determination process is a process for determining whether or not the medal is normally passed by the payout sensor 34c, and is a process executed in a state where the payout of the medal is permitted at the time of winning a small role or at the time of credit settlement. It is.

  The common general-purpose program in the game program is a process that is called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the game program. For example, a counter update process, a port input process, a data conversion process, an LED display process, a data setting process, Includes command setting processing. The counter update process is a process for updating the designated counter value, the port input process is a process for acquiring the input state of the designated port, and the data conversion process is input using game data. Is a process for converting and outputting the data, the LED display process is a process for setting the specified value to be displayed on the LED, and the data setting process is a process for setting the specified data, The command setting process is a process for setting a specified command in the command queue.

  In particular, the game program, when an abnormality is detected as described above, the release condition corresponding to the type of abnormality (in the case of random number abnormality, RAM abnormality, backup abnormality, setting value abnormality, resetting of the setting value, In the case of an abnormality other than the above, error processing is included that disables the progress of the game until a reset operation is established.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the non-game program includes a non-game dedicated program included only in the non-game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program that are the same as the game program.

  Non-game dedicated programs include, for example, test signal output processing, foreign object detection processing, door monitoring processing, external output 2 processing, inserted medal error determination processing, payout medal error determination processing, power failure determination processing, normal time command transmission processing, power interruption Includes time command transmission processing. The test signal output process is a process for outputting a test signal generated in relation to the game result, and the foreign object detection process is a process for detecting a foreign object in the medal path by the insertion port sensor 26. The door monitoring process is a process for detecting the opening of the front door 1b, and the external output 2 process is a security signal (door open signal, setting change signal, input error signal, payout error signal) among external output signals. The inserted medal error determination process is a process for performing output control. Based on the detection status of the inserted medal sensor 31, the inserted medal backflow detection, the medal clogging detection in the medal selector 29, and the foreign object detection in the medal selector 29 are performed. The payout medal error determination process is based on the detection status of the payout sensor 34c, and the medal detection near the payout exit The power failure determination process is a process for determining whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected, and is a normal time command. The transmission process is a process for transmitting one command set first in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91 among the commands set in the command queue by the command setting process of the game dedicated program and the non-game dedicated program. The power interruption command transmission process is a process for transmitting all commands set in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91.

  The common general-purpose program in the non-game program is a process that is called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the non-game program.For example, the counter update process, the port input process, Includes data conversion processing, LED display processing, data setting processing, and command setting processing.

  The non-game program includes processing for determining whether or not a predetermined detection status is based on the detection status of detection means (the slot sensor 26, the full sensor 35a, and the door opening detection switch 25) that are not involved in the progress of the game.

  In addition, the non-game program functions as a detection means related to the progress of a game in a specific control state among a plurality of control states (game start waiting process, internal lottery process, reel control process, game end time setting process). In other control states, the detection means (for example, the inserted medal sensor 31 and the payout sensor 34c) functioning as detection means not related to the progress of the game is based on the detection state in the control state not related to the progress of the game. A process for determining whether or not a predetermined detection status is present (for example, a inserted medal detection process or a payout medal detection process for detecting an abnormality caused by detecting the insertion of a medal during reel rotation or the payout of a medal) Including. Such a determination process corresponds to the common determination program because it is the same process as the process for determining whether or not the game program is in a predetermined detection status based on the detection status in the control state related to the progress of the game. .

  Of the processes included in the game program, the external output 1 process, the process of counting the number of medals inserted in the game start waiting process, the process of switching the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the number of medals paid out in the game end setting process Processing that does not directly relate to the progress of the game, such as counting, processing for detecting that the hopper tank 34a is empty, processing for updating software random numbers, processing related to AT, transmission processing for internal winning commands, etc. If so, a configuration in which all or part of these processes are included in the non-game program may be employed. On the other hand, as long as the processes included in the non-game program are indirectly related to the progress of the game, all or a part of these processes may be included in the game program.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls a non-game program in the process based on the game program, executes the process based on the non-game program, and ends the process based on the non-game program. Return to the processing based on the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a, in principle, executes the process based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area and uses the game RAM area as a work when executing the process based on the game program. The contents of the game RAM area can be referred to and updated. Further, the CPU 41a, in principle, executes processing based on the non-game program by referring to the game data in the non-game data area, and uses the non-game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-game RAM area.

  Further, the CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing processing based on the game program, but can refer to the non-game RAM area. In executing the processing based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

  In addition, the process based on the game program can be referred to only a specific area necessary for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection). In the processing based on the game RAM area, only specific areas required for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) can be referred to. In addition, a specific area in the non-game RAM area where the process based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the game RAM area where the process based on the non-game program can be referred to may be assigned to a continuous address area. However, a configuration in which part or all of the address areas are allocated to non-contiguous address areas may be used.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a game data area in which game data referred to by the game program is readable and stored, and work data referred to by the game program Is a game RAM area that is stored so as to be readable and writable, a program that is called by the game program, a non-game program area that stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game that is referenced by the non-game program Since a non-game data area in which data is stored in a readable manner and a non-game RAM area in which work data referred to by the non-game program are stored in a readable and writable manner are separately allocated, a game program, Game data and work program work data; Game program, the workpiece data of the non game data and non-game program, can be easily identified according to a difference in the storage area.

  In addition, by dividing the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied by the ROM 41b can be managed in a compact manner according to each function. It becomes easier to specify the corresponding data.

  Further, in this embodiment, when executing the game program, it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area, and when executing the non-game program, it is possible to refer to the game RAM area. In executing the game program, the data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and in executing the non-game program, the data used by the game program can be used easily. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. Does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

  Further, in this embodiment, the processing based on the game program can be referred to only a specific area required for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection). The processing based on the non-gaming program can be referred to only specific areas (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-gaming program in the gaming RAM area. Therefore, since the data that can be referred to by the game program in the non-game RAM area and the data that can be referred to by the non-game program are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can call a non-game program from the process based on the game program during the execution of the main process. As shown, it is possible to call a non-game program from a process based on the game program during the execution of the timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), when calling a non-game program from a main process based on a game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area, and performs a common call process. 1 is executed. The common call process 1 is a process included in the game program. In the common call process 1, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area and the stack pointer (SP, an address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is stored. Is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and the timer master permission flag is set to a value indicating that the interrupt is prohibited by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag, and then set to a specific area. Call the non-game program at the address.

  On the other hand, based on the called non-game program, the stack pointer (non-SP, address indicating the current position of the non-game stack area) of the non-game program is set and the process of the non-game program is executed. Thereafter, the game program of the caller, that is, the common call process 1 is restored.

  After returning to the common call process 1, the common call process 1 releases the prohibition of the timer interrupt by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating the permission of the interrupt, and saves the game stack area and the SP. Based on the data saved in the area, the register and the stack pointer of the game program are returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the process ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game program calls the non-game program, the interrupt is prohibited by the common call processing 1 and when returning from the non-game program to the game program, Since the prohibition is released, it is possible to set the interrupt to be prohibited over a period during which the non-game program is being executed.

  In addition, when a non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the non-game program first disables interrupts and then executes various processes. The configuration may be such that the prohibition of the interrupt is canceled, and by adopting such a configuration, the interrupt can be set to be prohibited during the period during which the non-game program is executed, as in the present embodiment. In addition, since the prohibition and cancellation of interrupts are set by a non-game program, it is not necessary to set and cancel the prohibition of interrupts in the common call processing 1 of the game program, and the capacity of the game program can be reduced. .

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when a non-game program is called from a timer interrupt process based on a game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area, Call process 2 is executed. In the common call process 2, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then specified. Call the non-game program at the address set in the area.

  On the other hand, the called non-game program sets the stack pointer of the non-game program, executes the process of the non-game program, and then returns to the common call process 2 of the caller.

  After returning to the common call process 2, the common call process 2 returns the register and the stack pointer of the game program to the state before calling the non-game program based on the data saved in the game stack area and the SP save area. Return and exit.

  As described above, in the common call process 2, unlike the call common process 1, the timer interrupt is not set to be prohibited or released. However, as described above, the main control unit 41 performs other interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Since the execution of the interruption process is prohibited, the interruption can be prohibited over the period during which the non-game program is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the game program executes the common call process 1 and the common call process 2 to call the non-game program and execute the non-game program. Regardless of whether or not there is, processing to save and protect all areas of the register is performed, so when returning to the game program, it is possible to reliably return from the state when the non-game program was called .

  In addition, without executing the common call process 1 and the common call process 2, the value of the register used by the game program immediately before calling the non-game program from the process based on the game program in the game program is protected. After all the processing based on the above is completed, the protected register value may be restored at the initial stage of returning to the game program. With such a configuration, the register is called before the non-game program is called. Since the protection process is performed and the register restoration process is performed after the return from the non-game program, the data stored in the register by the non-game program does not affect the game program.

  In addition, when a non-game program is called, the non-game program first saves the stack pointer and register of the game program, and returns the stack pointer and register of the game program to the end of the non-game program. With this configuration, as in this embodiment, when returning to the game program, it is possible to reliably return from the state when the non-game program is called, Capacity can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a timer interrupt process (main) that is executed by interrupting the main process at a constant interval (interval of about 0.56 ms). The timer interrupt process (main) is a process executed by an interrupt generated according to the count of the timer circuit 509. The address at which the program of the timer interrupt process (main) is stored is a vector table. It is set as a value corresponding to the timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, processing from that address is executed. Further, other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (main).

  In the present embodiment, the timer interruption process (main) is included in the game program, while the power interruption determination process, power interruption command transmission process, normal time command transmission process executed in the timer interruption process (main), The door monitoring process is included in the non-game program, and the main control unit 41 sets the prohibition of interrupt in the timer interrupt process (main), and saves the stack pointer and the register of the game program. The non-gaming program is called. Also, when returning from these non-game programs to timer interrupt processing (main), the stack pointer and registers of the game program are returned to the state before the call of the non-game program, and the subsequent processing is performed. It is supposed to run. Since the main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt process, the subsequent process is executed in the interrupt disabled state even after returning from the non-game program. To do.

  In addition, a power failure determination process, a power interruption command transmission process, a normal time command transmission process, and a door monitoring process that are non-game programs executed in the timer interrupt process (main) need to be executed before these non-game programs. Processing other than certain processing (for example, port input processing and motor phase signal output processing that need to be executed before the branching of the timer interrupt), that is, whether it is performed before or after the non-game program has an effect on control. It is supposed to run before no processing.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute a main process based on a program and interrupt a main process at a predetermined time interval to execute a timer interrupt process (main) based on a game program. It is also possible to call and execute a non-game program from (main).

  In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may malfunction due to the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) while the non-game program is being executed.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute the main process based on the game program, interrupt the main process at every predetermined time interval, and execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program. In a configuration in which a non-game program can be called and executed from the timer interrupt process (main), when calling a non-game program from the main process, When calling a non-game program from a timer interrupt process (main) while calling a non-game program, In other words, when a non-game program is called in a situation where there is a low possibility that an interrupt will occur, the non-game program is called without setting the interruption of other processes to be prohibited. It is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the prohibition of interruption while preventing malfunction due to execution of interruption.

  The timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is a process by a game program, for example, an LED dynamic display process, a control signal output process, etc., and a process by a non-game program, for example, normal time It consists of a plurality of processes including a command transmission process, a command transmission process at power interruption, etc., and a process by a predetermined game program among a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main) In particular, since a non-game program is called before a process that can be executed before or after these non-game programs, that is, a plurality of processes constituting a timer interrupt process (main) Because the non-game program is called as early as possible, the timer interrupt processing (main) is not terminated for some reason. Even if the Ma interrupt interrupt had occurred doubly generated, it is possible to prevent the other interrupts during execution of a non-game program from being executed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a game program and a non-game program, a game stack area for saving data used by the game program, and a non-game stack area for saving data used by the non-game program Are provided separately, and the main control unit 41 saves the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program in the stack area provided separately. Management becomes easier. In particular, data used by a game program saved due to the occurrence of a timer interrupt and data used by a non-game program executed during execution of timer interrupt processing (main) are mixed and stored in one stack area. As a result, stack management is not complicated.

  When executing the non-game program, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment saves the register values used in the game program in the game stack area, and then calls the non-game program to perform processing in the non-game program. When the processing in the non-game program is completed, the saved register value is restored, so that the register value used by the game program is not changed as the non-game program is executed. it can.

  When calling a non-game program from a process based on the game program, the call common process 1 or the call common process 2 for saving the register value used in the game program to the game stack area is called. By sharing a program for executing a non-game program in processing, the program capacity can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the main process, the call common process 1 is executed, while the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the timer interrupt process. In this case, the call common process 2 different from the call common process 1 is executed to save the register value used in the game program to the game stack area. In the main process, the process based on the game program is performed. The non-game program may be called from the process based on the game program in the timer interruption process, and the common call common process may be executed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to call and execute a non-game program from the main process and from the timer interrupt process (main). When calling, set the interrupt of other processes to be prohibited and call the non-game program, while when calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), disable the interrupt of other processes The main control unit 41 is configured to call a non-game program from the main process, or to call a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). It is good also as a structure which prohibits the interruption of this process.

  In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruption of other processes not only when calling a non-game program from the main process but also when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to interruption being executed during execution of the non-game program.

  In particular, when the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the interrupt prohibition is set, and when the timer interrupt process (main) ends, the interrupt prohibition is canceled, so that the timer interrupt process (main) Interruption of other processes will be prohibited during execution, but even in this case, when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts of other processes are prohibited again. Even when the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled due to the cause, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the interrupt being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

  In addition, when executing timer interrupt processing (main) as described above, interrupt prohibition is set, and when the timer interrupt processing (main) ends, timer prohibition is canceled, so timer interrupt processing In the configuration where interrupts of other processes are prohibited during execution of (main), but when interrupts of other processes are prohibited again when a non-game program is called from the timer interrupt process (main) By maintaining the setting of prohibition of interrupts of other processes set at the time of calling the non-game program even after the non-game program ends, the non-game is executed even while the timer interrupt process (main) is being executed. It is possible to prevent the prohibition of interrupts from being canceled by executing the program.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment initializes the game RAM area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed at the start of the setting change process. That is, initialization 0 for initializing all areas of the usable area is performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed at the start of the setting change process, the game RAM area except the special work area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area are initialized. That is, initialization 1 for initializing an area other than the special work in the usable area is performed.

  At the end of the setting change process, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized, that is, the special work and the game stack area in the game RAM area. Initialization 2 is performed to initialize areas other than (in use).

  Also, at the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, initialization 3 is performed to initialize the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area.

  Also, at the end of one game, not at the end of a specific game state, initialization 4 is performed to initialize the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs initialization 0 to 4 when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and among the usable areas of the RAM 41c when the first condition is satisfied as the predetermined condition. When at least a part of the game RAM area in which data used by the game program is stored is initialized and the second condition is established as a predetermined condition, at least a part of the game RAM area and the usable area of the RAM 41c At least a part of the non-game RAM area used by the non-game program is initialized.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, as a first condition, at the end of one game, an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused) that are a part of the game RAM area among the available areas. Is initialized, but the non-game RAM area of the usable area is not initialized. In addition, as a first condition, at the end of a specific gaming state, a general work, an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused) that are part of the gaming RAM area among the available areas are initialized. Of the possible areas, the non-game RAM area is not initialized. Also, as the first condition, after the setting change state is finished, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) that are a part of the game RAM area among the available areas are initialized. However, the non-game RAM area in the usable area is not initialized.

  On the other hand, as a second condition, when there is no abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3 that is a part of the game RAM area among the usable areas, The game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (used) are initialized, and all the non-game RAM areas are initialized. If the RAM is abnormal when the setting change state is started, all the game RAM areas in the usable area are initialized and all the game RAM areas are initialized.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of executing a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. A ROM 41b for storing the program is provided.

  In such a configuration, if a game program and a non-game program are mixed in one ROM 41b, it is difficult to determine which program is a program related to the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored. Since the areas are assigned separately, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is used as a game program work, and stores a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a non-game program work and stores data used by the non-game program. The RAM 41c includes a non-game RAM area, and since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are separately allocated in the RAM 41c, the data used by the game program and the non-game program are used. The main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied, and can specify the data. When the initialization condition 2 is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area is initialized and To initialize at least a portion of the non-gaming RAM area, it is possible to initialize the appropriate data in accordance with the status of the data used by data and non-game programs used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are part of the game RAM area, when the first game is completed as a first initialization condition. As a first initialization condition, when a special game state (BB) is finished and when one game is finished, a general work that is a part of the game RAM area, an unused area 3 and a game stack When the area (unused) is initialized and the setting change is completed and the main process is started as the first initialization condition, the important work and general work areas that are part of the game RAM area are not used. Since the use area 3 and the game stack area (unused) are initialized, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

  In addition, as a second initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change, important work, general work, unused area that are part of the game RAM area 3. A game stack area (unused) and a game stack area (in use) are initialized, and among the non-game RAM areas, an area that is referenced from a game program, an area that is not referenced from a game program, and a non-game stack area ( Unused) and non-game stack areas (in use), that is, all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized, and when there is an abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change as a second initialization condition, Among them, special work, important work, general work, unused area 3, game stack area (unused) and game stack area (in use), that is, game R In addition to initializing all areas of the M area, of the non-game RAM area, an area that is referenced from the game program, an area that is not referenced from the game program, a non-game stack area (unused), and a non-game stack area (in use) ) In other words, in order to initialize all areas of the non-game RAM area, data appropriate for the situation is initialized among data used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c and data used by the non-game program. can do.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied. What is necessary is just to initialize at least a part of the game RAM area when the initialization condition is satisfied, and it is also possible to initialize all areas of the game RAM area.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area and initialize all areas of the non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. However, the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied, and initializes at least a part of the non-game RAM area. It is sufficient that all areas of the game RAM area are initialized, all areas of the non-game RAM area may be initialized, or at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized. It is also possible to initialize all areas of the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured as a program that initializes the game RAM area and a program that initializes the non-game RAM area as separate programs, so that the game program is stored in the non-game RAM area. Since it is not necessary to initialize, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. Further, the program for initializing the game RAM area can be shared both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Furthermore, since a program for initializing the game RAM area is provided as a game program, and a program for initializing the non-game RAM area is provided as a non-game program, the game program initializes the non-game RAM area, It is possible to prevent the game program from affecting the non-game program and the non-game program from affecting the game program without initializing the area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the game end time process setting in the main process as the first initialization condition, and determines that it is not the end of the specific game state, that is, one game is ended. When the game ends, the start address of the initialization target RAM is set, and a predetermined area of the game RAM area is initialized by executing the game area initialization process, so that the game progresses for each game unit. A part of the unnecessary game RAM area can be initialized.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is activated when the setting key switch 37 is ON and starts the setting change process, that is, the second initialization condition is established based on the setting change operation being performed. The game area initialization process is executed to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization process is executed to initialize the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. Thus, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area can be initialized based on a game store clerk setting change operation (initialization operation).

  The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of this embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on a game program or when performing control based on a non-game program, and the first initialization condition Since the unused area 3 is initialized both when and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area 3.

  In this embodiment, the unused area 3 is initialized both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, but at least when the first initialization condition is satisfied. If the configuration is such that the unused area 3 is initialized when either one of the conditions when the second initialization condition is satisfied, illegal data can be prevented from being stored in the unused area 3. If the first initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions, invalid data is stored in the unused area 3 if the unused area 3 is initialized when at least one of the conditions is satisfied. Can be prevented. The same applies even if the second initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is used as a game program work, a game RAM area that stores data used by the game program, and a non-game program work that is used as a non-game program work. A RAM 41c including a game RAM area, and the RAM 41c is configured to retain data stored in the RAM 41c for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped by a backup power source. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 starts, the control unit 41 starts an initial setting process, and whether or not the storage content of the RAM is normal based on the data stored in the RAM 41c held by the backup power source. The data stored in the RAM 41c is determined to be normal. Resume control based on.

  In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, whether the storage contents of the RAM are normal based on the data stored in both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. When this is determined, the load when the control is resumed based on the data stored in the RAM 41c becomes excessive.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment starts the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and the RAM in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c held by the backup power source. It is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the parity and the destructive diagnosis data stored in the game RAM area, and if it is determined to be normal, the data stored in the game RAM area and the non-game Control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM area, and whether or not the non-game data stored in the non-game RAM area and that does not interfere with the game progress is normal. By omitting the determination, it is possible to reduce the load at the time of resuming the control while ensuring that the game can proceed normally.

  The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of this embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on a game program or when performing control based on a non-game program. The unit 41 executes an initial setting process when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, calculates a RAM parity of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the initial setting process, and calculates the calculated RAM Since it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the game RAM area are normal based on the parity, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area 3.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes an initial setting process when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and determines whether or not the storage content of the RAM 41c is destroyed in the initial setting process. When it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, the RAM abnormality flag is set to control the error processing, and thereafter the error state is maintained without being automatically restored, while the setting key switch 36 When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started in the state of ON, control is made to the setting change process, the game area initialization process is executed to initialize the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization The process is executed to initialize the non-game RAM area, that is, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error state is canceled. While game any abnormality has occurred in the RAM area and the non gaming RAM area can be prevented from proceeding.

  When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the initial setting process when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 sets a RAM abnormality flag. Then, when the setting key switch 36 is ON, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started and the setting change process is executed. The main control unit 41 is configured to initialize both the RAM area and the non-game RAM area, but when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the initial setting process. When it is determined that the game RAM area is determined, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized and controlled to error processing. In such a configuration, when controlling to error processing, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized, so that either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area is abnormal as in this embodiment. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with the occurrence of In addition, when it is determined that the storage contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized both when the setting change process is executed thereafter. Even with the configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the power interruption process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power interruption detection circuit 48 detects a decrease in the power supply voltage. In the power interruption process, the RAM 41c Access to both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area is prohibited by prohibiting access to the non-game RAM area that is not subject to determination as to whether or not the data is destroyed at the next startup. Thus, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored.

  Next, the main control unit 41 detects an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game (for example, an abnormality caused by detecting insertion or withdrawal of a medal during reel rotation, or insertion of a medal during a payout process). Control when outputting a security signal in the case of detecting an abnormality) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Insertion errors during the reel control process and the payout process are, for example, when a foreign object is inserted from the medal slot 4, when a foreign object exists in the medal flow path, and during the reel control process and the payout process. Regardless, it is detected when a medal inserted from the medal slot 4 flows down to the hopper tank 34a. Further, a payout error during the reel control process is detected when a medal is paid out when it is not the payout timing.

  In FIG. 12A, the start operation, the reel rotation start, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, and the payout indicate respective timings during the game progress. Specifically, the start operation indicates the timing when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The reel rotation start indicates the timing at which the reels 2L, 2C, 2R start to rotate. The first stop indicates a timing at which a stop operation that is first performed in a state where all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are still rotating is detected. The second stop indicates the timing when the rotation of any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has already stopped and the two reels are rotating, that is, the second stop operation is detected. The third stop indicates a state in which the rotation of two reels has already stopped and one reel is rotating, that is, the third stop operation is detected. The payout indicates the timing at which the medal payout process is performed.

  The abnormality detection indicates a timing at which an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected. The medal payout detection indicates the timing at which the payout medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c. The medal OUT signal is a signal indicating that one medal has been paid out by outputting one pulse. The security signal indicates an output status of a signal (for example, an insertion error signal or a payout error signal) indicating that an abnormality that does not prevent the progress of the game has occurred.

  FIG. 12 (a) shows an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game during the reel control process, and a medal payout detection, medal OUT signal, and security signal output when a winning with a medal payout occurs. It is the figure which showed timing. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, when an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected during the reel control process, a security signal is not output immediately after the abnormality is detected, but after the payout process is completed. The security signal is output before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed. Thereby, it is possible to recognize medals paid out in a situation where an abnormality has occurred during the reel control process. That is, it is possible to recognize the game value given in the situation where an abnormality has occurred.

  Also, as conventionally known, when an abnormality is detected during a game when an abnormality is detected during the game, if an abnormality signal is output after the processing related to the game is completed, an `` abnormality during game '' Cannot distinguish “abnormalities immediately after the game ends”. However, in this embodiment, when an abnormality is detected at a predetermined timing within a period from the start of the game to the end of the provision of the game medium, the medal OUT signal is output after the end of the provision of the game medium. Start outputting security signals before completion. Thereby, for example, a hall computer of an amusement shop analyzed the output timing of the medal OUT signal and the security signal collected by the collecting unit, and the security signal was output before the output of the medal OUT signal was completed. By detecting this, it is possible to distinguish “abnormality in game” instead of “abnormality immediately after game”.

  In FIG. 12A, the medal OUT signal is output after the payout process is completed. For example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the medal OUT is detected every time a medal payout is detected. A signal may be output. Even in such a case, if the output of the security signal is started before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, for example, the output of the medal OUT signal corresponding to the detection of the last medal payout is detected. The output of the security signal may be started at the timing.

  Next, the control contents of the timer counter update process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the present embodiment, the value of the timer counter assigned to the RAM 41c is periodically updated to become a specific value (0), thereby specifying the passage of time. Conventionally, when measuring multiple types of time intervals, timer values are set and updated within multiple types of processing that require timekeeping, and each type of program for updating multiple types of timer values is processed. Since it is necessary to provide it inside, it was a factor which increased program capacity. In addition, since multiple types of timer counters are assigned as data groups for each process used, it is necessary to read out the values of unrelated addresses in order to update all of them in one process. there were.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, an area in which a plurality of types of timer counter values are stored is set to an area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule in the RAM 41c, and the timer value stored in the designated address is Since multiple types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing the update process while changing the specified address for the area where multiple types of timer counter values are stored by adding a constant to the current specified address Thus, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where each of the processes for designating a plurality of types of addresses and updating the values of the addresses is performed in each process.

  Multiple types of timers can be obtained by repeatedly executing the process of updating the timer value stored at the specified address while changing the specified address for the area where the multiple types of timer counter values are stored by performing a predetermined calculation. Any configuration may be used as long as the value is updated. For example, by adding a constant to the current designated address, multiple types can be obtained by repeatedly executing while changing the designated address for an area in which multiple types of timer counter values are stored. The timer value may be updated, or a value corresponding to the number of processes with respect to the reference address (for example, for a 1-byte counter, +1 for the number of processes 1, +1 for the number of processes 2, and the number of processes While changing the designated address for the area where multiple types of timer counter values are stored by adding or subtracting +3 ...) for 3 Ri may be configured to update a plurality of types of the timer value by return run.

  Further, only for some of the timer counters provided in the main control unit 41, a process of setting a timer value in an area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule in the RAM 41c and updating the timer value stored in the designated address, A configuration in which a plurality of types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing a predetermined calculation while changing a designated address for an area in which a plurality of types of timer values are stored may be employed.

  In this embodiment, a separate timer counter is provided for each type of period to be measured. For example, a single timer counter may be shared for a plurality of types of periods in which the measurement periods do not overlap.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the process according to the timer interruption process (main) for periodically performing a predetermined process regardless of the progress of the game and the progress of the game. A main process that performs different processes in stages, and the main control unit 41 sets an initial value to the timer counter when a timing condition is satisfied in the main process, and a plurality of types of timer interrupt processes (main) The timer value is updated, and it is not necessary to provide a process for updating multiple types of timer values in each process constituting the main process, so the program capacity for updating multiple types of timer values is reduced. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed by periodically interrupting the main process. However, in the timer interrupt process periodically performed, it is determined in advance regardless of the progress of the game. The main control unit 41 may be configured to perform both a periodic process for performing the processed process and a main process for performing a process that varies stepwise depending on the progress of the game. By setting an initial value to the timer counter when the timing condition is satisfied in the process and updating multiple types of timer values in the periodic process, multiple types of timer values are set in each process constituting the main process. Since it is not necessary to provide a process for updating, it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to updating of a plurality of types of timer values.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the time counter update process, the value of the address is updated on condition that the value of the designated address is not 0, and the timer value is updated to an abnormal value. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the time counter update process, the number of processes equal to the number of timer counters to be updated is set, and the process of updating the timer value is repeatedly executed for the set number of processes. The number of timer counters to be updated can be easily set. For example, when a plurality of types of timer counters having different update intervals are provided, the type of timer value to be updated can be arbitrarily set according to the number of processes to be set. it can.

  Note that the number of processes, that is, the number of timer counters to be updated may be set in a program, or values set in a table may be read and set.

  In addition, the timer counter to be updated last is set in advance without setting the number of processes at the beginning, and the timer value is updated repeatedly until the address of the timer counter is reached. It is also possible to store a specific end value (for example, FFh) at the next address of the timer counter, and to repeatedly execute the process of updating the timer value until the value read from the specified address becomes the specific end value. good.

  In this embodiment, a 1-byte timer counter and a 2-byte timer counter are provided, and a process for updating a 1-byte timer value and a process for updating a 2-byte timer value are separately provided. Therefore, the capacity of the program and the capacity occupied by the timer value in the RAM 41c can be reduced as compared with the case where the process of updating the 1-byte timer value and the process of updating the 2-byte timer value are made common.

  In this embodiment, a relatively long time corresponding to an initial value exceeding 1 byte is measured by providing a 2-byte timer counter. For example, a timer counter having a different update interval, for example, a timer, is used. Interrupt processing (main) By providing a first timer counter that is updated once every four times and a second timer counter that is updated once every fourteen times, a relative value can be obtained without providing a 2-byte counter. It is also possible to employ a configuration for measuring a long time interval. By doing so, it is not necessary to provide a process for updating a 1-byte timer value and a process for updating a 2-byte timer value. It is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the update.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of timer counters are assigned to special works that are not initialized in accordance with the progress of the game in the RAM 41c, and are not initialized in accordance with the progress of the game. Regardless of the progress of the game, it is possible to measure the time spanning the timing when a part of the RAM 41c is initialized in accordance with the progress of the game.

  In particular, in this embodiment, not only the timer counter that may cross the timing when the measurement period ends in one game, that is, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized as the game progresses, Since the timer counter that does not cross over the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress is stored in the area assigned to the special work together with other timer counters, the timer counter can be easily managed. In addition, a timer counter that does not cross over the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game is set, and a timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized at the measurement period according to the progress of the game. The usage of the timer counter can be easily changed by a later design change, such as changing to a timer counter that may straddle. It can be. In addition, as described above, if a single timer counter is shared for a plurality of types of periods in which measurement periods do not overlap, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized may be crossed as the game progresses. It is possible to measure the measurement period and the measurement period that does not cross the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized in accordance with the progress of the game with one timer counter.

  FIG. 13 to FIG. 15 are diagrams for explaining the types of roles, symbol combinations, and technical matters related to the roles in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the symbol combination and the technical matters related to the transition event in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the special combination of the winning combinations includes two types of bonuses: a big bonus (hereinafter, the big bonus is referred to as BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, the regular bonus is referred to as RB). BB is won when a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is aligned on the winning line LN at RT0-4. When winning the BB, the game shifts to a big bonus that is controlled every game by a regular bonus (to be referred to as RB hereinafter). The big bonus ends on condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out. RB is awarded when the combination of “blue 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on the winning line LN at RT0-4. When winning an RB, the game proceeds to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). The regular bonus ends on the condition that any combination wins 6 times or 12 games have been consumed. As shown in FIG. 17, RT4 is controlled from winning BB or RB until winning, and after the big bonus or regular bonus (collectively referred to as bonus) is finished, it is controlled by RT3. The Rukoto.

  As shown in FIG. 14, among the winning combinations, the upper bell 1, the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, the upper bell 8, and the middle bell are included. , Right-down bell, middle-stage watermelon, right-down watermelon, horn cherry 1, and horn cherry 2. In the following description, when it is not necessary to distinguish the upper bell 1, the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, and the upper bell 8, they are simply referred to as upper bells. .

  The upper bell 1 has “Replay a-Cherry a-Cherry a”, “Replay a-Cherry a-White 7”, “Replay a-Cherry a-BAR”, “Replay a” in the winning line LN in any gaming state. -Cherry b-Cherry a "," Replay a-Cherry b-White 7 "," Replay a-Cherry b-BAR "combination was awarded, and the top bell 1 won in any gaming state Sometimes 8 medals are paid out. The top bell 2 wins when the combination of “Replay a-Cherry a-Plum” and “Replay a-Cherry b-Plum” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. When the upper bell 2 wins, 8 medals are paid out. The upper bell 3 is displayed when the combination of “Replay a-Plum-Cherry a”, “Replay a-Plum-White 7”, and “Replay a-Plum-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. Winning is won and 8 medals are paid out when the upper bell 3 wins in any gaming state. The upper bell 4 wins when the combination of “replay a-plum-plum” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and eight medals when the upper bell 4 wins in any gaming state. Will be paid out. The upper bell 5 has “Replay b-Cherry a-Cherry a”, “Replay b-Cherry a-White 7”, “Replay b-Cherry a-BAR”, “Replay b” in the winning line LN in any gaming state. -Cherry b-Cherry a "," Replay b-Cherry b-White 7 "," Replay b-Cherry b-BAR "combination was awarded, and the upper bell 5 won in any gaming state Sometimes 8 medals are paid out. The top bell 6 wins when the combination of “Replay b-Cherry a-Plum” and “Replay b-Cherry b-Plum” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. When the upper bell 6 wins, 8 medals are paid out. The upper bell 7 is displayed when the combination of “Replay b-Plum-Cherry a”, “Replay b-Plum-White 7”, and “Replay b-Plum-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. Winning is won and 8 medals are paid out when the upper bell 7 wins in any gaming state. The upper bell 8 wins when the combination of “Replay a-plum-plum” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and 8 medals when the upper bell 8 wins in any gaming state Will be paid out. The combination of symbols constituting the upper bell 1 to the upper bell 8 is aligned with the winning line LN, so that the combination of “bell-bell-bell” can be aligned with the invalid line LM1.

  The middle bell wins when the combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and 8 medals are paid out when the middle bell wins in any gaming state. . The right-down bells appear on the winning line LN in any gaming state, as “Replay a-bell-red 7”, “Replay a-bell-replay a”, “Replay b-bell-red 7”, “Replay b-bell”. -When a combination of "Replay a" is completed, a prize is awarded. In any gaming state, when the right-down bell is awarded, eight medals are paid out.

  The middle stage watermelon is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and five medals are paid out when the middle stage watermelon is awarded in any gaming state. . A right-down watermelon is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry b” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state, and 5 medals when a right-down watermelon wins in any gaming state. Will be paid out. When the combination of symbols constituting the right-down watermelon is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  Corner Cherry 1 wins when the combination of “Red 7-Bell-Bell” and “BAR-Bell-Bell” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. When winning, one medal is paid out. Corner Cherry 2 wins when the combination of “Red 7-Bell-Replay a” and “BAR-Bell-Replay a” is aligned on the winning line LN in any gaming state. When Cherry 2 wins, one medal is paid out.

  As shown in FIG. 15, among the winning combinations, replaying players include middle replay, right-up replay, promotion replay, fall replay, special replay, red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay, missed replay a, missed replay b Is included.

  The middle stage replay is awarded when the combination of “Replay a-Replay a-Replay a” and “Replay b-Replay a-Replay a” is completed on the winning line LN at RT0 to RT4, and the replay game (replay) is played. Is granted. A replay that goes up to the right is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Replay a-Red 7” or “Bell-Replay a-Bell” is aligned on the winning line LN in RT1 to RT4, and a replay game (replay) is given. The The promotion replay is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay a-replay a” is arranged on the winning line LN at RT1, and a replay game (replay) is given. The fall replays are “Bell-Red 7-Cherry a”, “Bell-Red 7-Watermelon”, “Bell-Red 7-Plum”, “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry a”, “ "Bel-Watermelon-Watermelon", "Bell-Watermelon-Plum", "Bell-Cherry a-Cherry a", "Bell-Cherry a-Watermelon", "Bell-Cherry a-Plum" Thus, a replay game (replay) is given. The special replay is awarded when a combination of “replay a-replay a-bell” and “replay b-replay a-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN at RT0, and a replay game (replay) is given. The red 7-match replay is awarded when the combination of “Replay b-Blue 7-Replay a” is aligned on the winning line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay) is given. The blue 7 uniform replay is awarded when the combination of “Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay a” is aligned on the winning line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay) is given. The missed replay a is awarded when the combination of “replay a-blue 7-replay a” is arranged on the winning line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay) is given. The missed replay b is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Blue 7-Replay a” is aligned on the winning line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay) is given.

  When the combination of “Replay b-Blue 7-Replay a” constituting the red 7-matched replay is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7” can be aligned with the invalid line LM2. In addition, the combination of “Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay a” constituting the blue 7-match replay is aligned with the winning line LN, so that the combination of “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7” is aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the transition outcomes are “Replay a-Cherry a-Bell”, “Replay a-Cherry b-Bell”, “Replay a-Plum-Bell”, “Replay b-Cherry a-Bell”. , "Replay b-Cherry b-Bell", "Replay b-Plum-Bell", "Replay a-Bell-Cherry a", "Replay a-Bell-White 7", "Replay a-Bell-BAR", " Replay a-bell-plum, Replay b-bell-cherry a, Replay b-bell-white 7, Replay b-bell-BAR, Replay b-bell-plum, Bell-cherry "a-cherry a", "bell-cherry a-white 7", "bell-cherry a-BAR", "bell-cherry a-plum", "bell-cherry b-cherry a", "bell-cherry b-" "White 7", "Belch “Lee b-BAR”, “Bell-Cherry b-Plum”, “Bell-Plum-Cherry a”, “Bell-Plum-White 7”, “Bell-Plum-BAR”, “Bell-Plum-Plum” When RT0, RT2 and RT3 are aligned with the winning line LN, the process shifts to RT1. In this embodiment, the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4 are elected, the reels other than the reels which are the winning conditions for the middle bell are set as the first stop, and the elected upper bell is missed. In this case, the transfer outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 to FIG. 23, combinations of lottery object combinations that are read as lottery object combinations for each gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, the role to be subject to the internal lottery or whether the game state is RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, or RB (including RB in BB) At least one of the winning probabilities is different. As will be described later as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read out simultaneously and can be won in duplicate. In FIG. 19 to FIG. 21, the lottery target combination is shown in the vertical column, and the gaming state is shown in the horizontal column. In the column where the gaming state intersects with the lottery target, a circle indicates that it is a lottery target when in the gaming state, and a cross indicates that it is not a lottery target when in the gaming state. It shows that. Also, the numerical values shown below the circles indicate the number of determination values of a predetermined set value (common in this embodiment regardless of the set value). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” corresponding to a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery subject for which “300” is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536. FIG. 19 shows combinations of special combinations that are read as lottery targets for each gaming state, FIG. 20 shows combinations of small roles that are read as lottery targets for each gaming state, and FIG. The combination of the replay game combination read out as a combination is shown. In FIGS. 22 to 23, “+” is written between winning winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is simultaneously read out in the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT0, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, The replay GR11, the replay GR12, the replay GR13, the replay GR14, the replay GR15, and the replay GR16 are subject to internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT1, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, Replay GR1, Replay GR2, Replay GR3, Replay GR4, Replay GR5, and Replay GR6 are targeted for internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT2, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, Replay GR21, replay GR22, replay GR23, and promoted replay are targeted for internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT3, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay It becomes a target for internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT4, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, and normal replay are the subject of internal lottery. When the gaming state is RB, strong cherries, weak cherries, watermelons, and common bells are targeted for internal lottery.

  The left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, the right bell 1 to 4, the common bell, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, and the watermelon are combinations or combinations of combinations shown in FIG. 22. In the following, when it is not particularly necessary to distinguish, left bells 1 to 4 are simply referred to as left bells, middle bells 1 to 4 are simply referred to as middle bells, and right bells 1 to 4 are simply referred to as right bells. There is. Moreover, when it is not necessary to distinguish any of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4, they may be simply referred to as push order bells.

  Normal replay, replay GR1 to 6, replay GR11 to 16, and replay GR21 to 23 are combinations of combinations shown in FIG. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the replays GR1 to 6, the replays GR11 to 16, and the replays GR21 to 23, they may be simply referred to as push order replays.

  In this embodiment, when the push order bell is won, as shown in FIG. 24, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs according to the type of the push order bell and the stop order. For example, if the left bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of the middle bell stops at the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop or in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop, either the combination of the upper bell 1 and the upper bell 8 or the transition outcome is Stop at the winning line LN. The same applies to the left bells 2 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4. As illustrated in FIG.

  Specifically, when the reel in which the push order bell is won and the middle bell is awarded as the first stop is stopped, the bell design is stopped at the middle of the reel, and then the remaining By performing the reel stop operation, the “bell” is also stopped at the middle stage of the remaining reels, and the combination of the middle stage bells is aligned with the winning line LN.

  On the other hand, when the pushing bell is elected and a reel other than the reel that the middle bell wins as the first stop is operated, the first stop reel and the second stop reel are elected. The upper bell (in the case of the left bell, "Replay a" or "Replay b" for the left reel, "Cherry a", "Cherry b" or "Plum" for the middle reel, and for the right reel “Cherry a”, “White 7”, “BAR” or “Plum”) can be stopped at the middle stage, and when the two reels stop, the winning upper bell can be stopped at the winning line LN Situation (If left bell 1, "Replay a-Cherry a / Cherry b-Rotating", "Replay a-Rotating-Cherry a / White 7 / BAR", "Replay b-Plum-Rotating" "Replay b-rotating-plum"), and if the third stop reel is stopped at a timing at which the winning upper bell can be pulled in, the middle stage of the third stop reel The winning top bell constituent symbols are stopped, the winning top bell combination is aligned with the winning line LN, and the winning top bell constituent symbols are arranged at a timing other than the timing at which the third stopping reel can be pulled in. If the stop operation has been performed, the “bell” is stopped at the middle stage of the third stop reel, and the transition output combination (if the left bell is 1, “replay a-cherry a / cherry b-bell”, “Replay a-Bell-Cherry a / White 7 / BAR”, “Replay b-Plum-Bell”, “Replay b-Bell-Plum”) are aligned to the winning line LN. When the two reels are stopped, the winning upper bell cannot be stopped on the winning line LN (if the left bell is 1, “Replay b-Cherry a / Cherry b-Rotating”, “ Replay b-rotating-cherry a / white 7 / BAR "," replay a-plum-rotating "," replay a-rotating-plum ") Regardless, stop the “bell” in the middle of the third stop reel, and if it is left bell 1, the combination of “replay b-cherry a / cherry b-bell”, “replay b-bell- "Cherry a / White 7 / BAR", "Replay a-Plum-Bell", "Replay a-Bell-Plum") on the winning line LN. Further, when the transition outcomes are aligned with the winning line LN, the invalid line LM1 has a combination of “other than bell-bell-bell”, “other than bell-bell-bell”, and “other than bell-bell-bell”.

  For this reason, when the push order bell is won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the operation is performed in the stop order according to the type of the push order bell. In other words, even if one of the push order bells is won, if the type is not known, it is not possible to intentionally select the stop order according to the type, and if the stop order matches, the middle bell is definitely won By doing so, medals can be obtained with certainty, but if the stopping order does not match, medals can be obtained only at a certain rate. In particular, in RT0 and RT2, since the transition point stops when the stop order does not match, if the stop order does not match, the transition to RT1 occurs at a certain rate. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the middle bell wins at an equal rate and 8 medals can be obtained, so the player performs the stop operation in any stop order. Can be prevented from becoming extremely disadvantageous.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the transition outcome can be stopped, and even if the stop operation is performed at any timing, the transition is surely performed. The timing for avoiding the exit is not present, and the stop of the transition exit cannot be intentionally avoided unless the type of the push order bell is known.

  In this embodiment, when the pushing order bell is won, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode in which the middle or upper bell can be won, the transitional outcome is always stopped. However, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which the middle bell or the upper bell cannot be won at the time of winning the push order bell, the transition start or miss, that is, the symbol that does not generate any winnings It may be configured to stop a combination of symbols that is a combination and that is not a symbol combination that constitutes the transition outcome.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR1 to GR6 are elected, as shown in FIG. 25, the combination of symbols to be stopped is different according to the type and stop order. For example, when replay GR1 (middle replay + promotion replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of stop in the middle left and right, the combination of promotion replay stops in the winning line LN and the stop order other than the left center right When the stop operation is performed at, the middle stage replay combination is stopped at the winning line LN. The same applies to the replays GR2 to GR6, as shown in FIG. For this reason, when replay GR1-6 is won in RT1, the promotion replay wins by operating in the stop order corresponding to the type, but if the type is not known, intentionally select the stop order according to the type If the stop order matches, it is possible to shift to RT0 by winning the promoted replay. However, if the stop order does not match, RT1 is maintained. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the promotion replay wins at an equal rate and shifts to RT0. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR11 to 16 are elected, as shown in FIG. 26, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type and stop order. For example, when the replay GR11 (special replay + middle stage replay + falling replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of stopping with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of the middle stage replay stops at the winning line LN, When the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the middle reel as the first stop, the combination of special replays stops at the winning line LN, and when the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the right reel as the first stop The combination of fall replay stops on the winning line LN. When replay GR12 (special replay + middle replay + fall replay + right replay) is selected and the stop operation is performed in the order of stop with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of middle replay stops at the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the falling replays is stopped on the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop. In this case, the special replay combination stops on the winning line LN. When replay GR13 (special replay + middle stage replay + tumble replay + red 7 complete replay) is selected and the stop operation is performed in the order of stop with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of tumble replay is placed on the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the middle stage replay is stopped on the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop. If this happens, the special replay combination stops at the winning line LN. When replay GR14 (special replay + middle replay + tumble replay + red 7-match replay + right-up replay) is selected and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the special replay combination is When stopping at the winning line LN and performing a stop operation in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the middle stage replays stops at the winning line LN and in the stop order with the right reel being the first stop. When the stop operation is performed, the combination of the fall replay stops on the winning line LN. When replay GR15 (special replay + middle replay + tumble replay + blue 7 complete replay) is selected and the stop operation is performed in the order of stop with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of special replay is placed on the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the tumble replay is stopped on the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop. If this happens, the middle stage replay combination stops on the winning line LN. When replay GR16 (special replay + middle stage replay + tumble replay + blue 7-match replay + right-up replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of tumble replay is When stopping at the winning line LN and performing a stop operation in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop, the special replay combination stops at the winning line LN and in the stop order with the right reel as the first stop. When the stop operation is performed, the middle stage replay combination stops on the pay line LN.

  For this reason, when the replays GR11 to 16 are won at RT0, special replays are won by operating in the stop order corresponding to the type, but if the type is not known, the stop order according to the type is intentionally If the operated stop order matches the stop order corresponding to the middle replay, RT0 can be maintained by winning the middle replay and matches the stop order corresponding to the special replay. Then, it is possible to shift to RT2 by winning the special replay, but if the stop order corresponding to the middle replay and the stop order corresponding to the special replay do not match, the fall replay wins and moves to RT1. May end up. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the middle stage replay wins and RT0 is maintained at an equal rate, the special replay wins and moves to RT2, and the fall replay wins. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming extremely disadvantageous regardless of the stop order in which the player performs the stop operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, RT0 is maintained when replay GR11, 12 is won at RT0, when replay GR13, 14 is won at RT0, and when replay GR15, 16 is won at RT0. The stop order (first stop reel) in which the replay is won differs from the stop order (first stop reel) in which the special replay that moves to RT2 is won. In addition, when the replays GR11 and 12 are won at RT0, the stop order (first stop reel) for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained is the same, but when the replay GR11 is won and the replay GR12 The stop order (first stop reel) in which the special replay for shifting to RT2 is won is different from the case where is won. The same applies when the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0 and the replays GR15 and 16 are won at RT0. For this reason, even if the stop order for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained is specified, the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 from the stop order cannot be specified.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR21 to 23 are selected, as shown in FIG. 26, the combination of symbols to be stopped is different according to the type and stop order. For example, replay GR21 (red 7-match replay + missed replay a + middle replay) wins and stops in the order in which the right, middle, and left reels stop and the symbols that make up the red 7-match replay at each reel can be stopped at the middle of the reel. When the operation is performed, the red 7-match replay combination stops at the winning line LN, and the symbols constituting the red 7-match replay stop in the middle of the reel in the order of stop of the right middle left reel and the right middle reel. When the stop operation is performed at a timing that can be stopped, and when the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbols constituting the red 7-match replay cannot be stopped at the middle stage of the reel for the left reel, the combination of the missing replay a is the winning line LN The symbols that make up the replay in the order of stopping the right middle left reel and the red reel for the right reel If the stop operation is performed at a timing at which it is possible to stop at the middle stage, and if the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbols constituting the red 7-match replay cannot be stopped at the middle stage of the reel for the middle left reel, the combination of the middle stage replay Stops at the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stopping order other than the stopping order of the right middle left reel, the combination of the middle stage replays stops at the winning line LN.

  Also, Replay GR22 (Red 7 Align Replay + Blue 7 Align Replay + Missing Replay a + Middle Replay) is selected, and the symbols that make up the red 7 Align Replay and Blue 7 Align Replay in the order of stopping the right middle left reel and each reel. When the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the reel can be stopped at the middle stage of the reel, the red 7-match replay combination or the blue 7-match replay combination stops on the winning line LN while giving priority to the blue 7-match replay combination. The left and right reels are stopped in the order that the red and right 7 reels are replayed and the blue and 7 blue replays are stopped at the middle of the reels. The left reel is red 7 and red. When a stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbols that make up the 7-piece replay cannot be stopped at the middle of the reel The combination of the missing replay a stops at the winning line LN, and stops at the timing at which the symbols constituting the red 7-aligned replay and blue 7-aligned replay can be stopped in the middle stage of the reel in the order of stopping the right middle left reel. If a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbols constituting the red 7-aligned replay and blue 7-aligned replay cannot be stopped at the middle of the reel for the middle left reel, the combination of the middle replay is the winning line. When stopping at LN and performing a stop operation in a stop order other than the stop order of the right, middle and left reels, the middle stage replay combination stops at the winning line LN.

  In addition, the replay GR23 (missing replay b + middle stage replay) is won, and the symbols constituting the missing replay b in the order of stop of the right middle left reel and the right middle reel (red seven-match replay, blue seven-match replay). If the stop operation is performed at a timing that can be stopped at the middle stage of the reel, the combination of the missed replay b stops at the pay line LN, and the right middle reel is dropped in the order of stoppage of the right middle left reel. When the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbols constituting the reel cannot be stopped at the middle stage of the reel, the combination of the middle stage replay stops at the winning line LN and stops in a stop order other than the stop order of the right middle left reel. When the operation is performed, the middle stage replay combination stops on the winning line LN.

  In the present embodiment, even if the red 7-aligned replay or blue 7-aligned replay is won by performing the stop operation in the order of stopping the right middle left reel, the stop operation is performed in the order of stopping the right middle left reel, Even when the replay a and the middle stage replay are won, the replay is given in the same manner, so there is no disadvantage even if the player performs the stop operation in any stop order.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the control is performed to any one of RT 0 to 4 and bonuses (RB, RB in BB). RT0 shifts by winning a promotion replay at RT1 and RT2. Regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT0, RT0 transitions to RT1 by winning a fall replay or stopping the transition, or transitions to RT2 by winning a special replay, or a special role is won And it complete | finishes by transfering to RT4. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed in the order of stop according to the navigation notification, and becomes 100% or less when the navigation notification is not executed. RT1 shifts at RT0, RT2, RT3 when a fall replay is won or when a transition is stopped. Then, RT1 ends by shifting to RT0 by winning a promotion replay or shifting to RT4 by winning a special role, regardless of the number of games since shifting to RT1. The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%. RT2 shifts by winning a special replay at RT0. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT2 transitions to RT0 due to the promotion replay winning, transitions to RT1 due to the stop of the transitional outcome, or transitions to RT4 due to the winning of special role. That's it. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed in the order of stop according to the navigation notification, and becomes 100% or less when the navigation notification is not executed. RT3 shifts to the end of the bonus (BB, RB). Then, RT3 is terminated by transitioning to RT1 by stopping the transition or regardless of the number of games since transitioning to RT3, or by transitioning to RT4 by winning a special role. The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%. RT4 shifts by winning special roles (BB, RB) in RT0-3. RT4 ends when the special combination that triggered the transition to RT4 wins and shifts to a bonus (BB or RB) regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT4. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% both when the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification and when the navigation notification is not executed. RB shifts due to RB winning in RT4. Then, the RB ends when 12 games are digested or 6 times are won. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%. BB shifts by winning BB at RT4. The BB ends when the total number of medals paid out during the BB exceeds a specified number (316 in this embodiment) regardless of the number of games since the transition to the BB. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%.

  Among RT0 to 4, RB, and BB (RB), RB and BB have the highest medal payout rate per game and are the most advantageous gaming state. RT0, RT2 and RT4 of RT0-4 have a higher probability of winning a re-gamer, and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT1 and 3, compared to RT1 and RT3. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player. RT0, 2 of RT0, 2, 4 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than RT4 in that the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT4. RT2 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than RT0 in that there is a high possibility that the number of ART games described later will be added.

  Further, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is RT0 to 2, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification that notifies the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period.

  When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification by winning the notification target combination corresponding to the gaming state, and the first internal winning command to the sub control unit 91 By transmitting the second internal winning command and the pressing order command, the navigation control by the sub-control unit 91 is executed. The notification target combination corresponding to the gaming state is replay GR1 to 6 when pushing RT1, push order bell when it is RT0, replay GR11 to 16 when pushing RT, replay GR21 to 26 when it is RT2, Pushing bell. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes navigation notification by satisfying certain conditions even in a normal state (RT1 and non-AT state) where neither AT nor ART is controlled. It is possible to execute a navigation effect. The navigation notification of the present embodiment notifies the stop order advantageous for the player in an identifiable manner by changing the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. The navigation notification mode will be described in detail later.

  The navigation effect of the present embodiment notifies the stop order advantageous for the player notified by the navigation notification by displaying the navigation image from the liquid crystal display 51 and the output of the navigation sound from the speakers 53 and 54. For example, when informing the stop order of the left middle right stop switch 8L such as “123” (indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop), A stop order image indicating the stop order of 8C and 8R is displayed. In addition, as the navigation voice, for example, “left middle right!” (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop) Is output. Further, when the stop order in which the left reel is first stopped is notified, the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R such as “1--” (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is indicated. Display stop order images. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, “left!” (Indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) (indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) indicating the stop switch stop order is output. To do. In particular, when the replay GRs 21 to 26 are elected at RT2 and the stop order in which the red 7 complete replay, red 7 missing replay or blue 7 complete replay, blue 7 missing replay wins is notified, the stop order image described above. In addition, an image prompting a stop operation at a timing targeting red 7 and blue 7 is also displayed on each reel, and a stop operation at that timing is prompted. In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a player is distinguishable according to a winning condition. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to using the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54, but may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  In the navigation notification and the navigation effect, when any of the replays GR1 to GR6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the promotion replay wins is identifiable so as to be identifiable. In addition, when any of the replays GR11 to 16 is won at RT0, the stop order in which the middle stage replay or special replay wins is notified in an identifiable manner. In addition, when any of the replays GR21 to 23 is selected in RT2, the stop order in which the red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay, missed replay a or missed replay b can be won is identifiable. .

  As described above, in the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the stop order that is advantageous to the player is notified in an identifiable manner. For this reason, the player can intentionally win a promotion replay at RT1 and shift to RT0, or win a middle bell at RT0 by performing stop operations in the order of stop according to the navigation effect. Maintaining RT0 by winning middle replay, winning special replay and moving to RT2, avoiding falling replay winning, winning middle bell, and avoiding stopping transition In RT2, it is possible to avoid red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay, missed replay a or missed replay b, win a middle bell, and stop transitions.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to ART (a state controlled by AT at RT0) when the lottery condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell win). ART lottery to determine whether or not. Further, the main control unit 41 can control the precursor period indicating the possibility of winning the ART lottery over a predetermined period (number of games), and determines the length of the precursor period according to the result of the ART lottery. A lottery will be drawn. Then, the main control unit 41 wins the ART lottery and controls the ART when the precursor period determined by the precursor period lottery has elapsed.

  When controlling to ART, first control to AT. The state from the start of the AT control to the transition to RT0 is also referred to as a preparation state. The main control unit 41 performs navigation notification when the target combination is won in the preparation state. At this time, in RT1, when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, navigation notification is performed, and when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, the stop order for winning the promoted replay is notified by the navigation notification, so stop according to the notified stop order. By performing the operation, it is possible to shift the promotion replay from RT1 to RT0. In addition, after the transition to the ready state, the stop order for winning the middle bell when the push order bell is won is notified, so that the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order, so that eight medals can be reliably obtained. It becomes possible.

  The main control unit 41 finishes the preparation state when the promoted replay wins at RT1, and starts the ART control. Accordingly, the main control unit 41 sets the predetermined number of games as the number of remaining ART games allocated to the RAM 91c, and starts counting the number of remaining ART games. After the ART starts, the stop order for winning the middle bell when the push order bell is won will be notified, so it is possible to reliably acquire 8 medals by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. At the same time, it is possible to avoid stopping the transition event and winning the fall replay and avoiding the transition to RT1. In addition, when the extra state lottery described later is not won, the stop order for winning the middle stage replay when the replays GR11 to 16 are won is notified by the navigation notification, so the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order. This makes it possible to maintain the RT0 by winning the middle stage replay.

  Further, after the start of ART, every time one game is consumed, the number of remaining games is decremented by 1, and when the remaining number of games becomes 0, the AT control is terminated. As a result, the navigation notification is not executed, so it becomes impossible to avoid the stop of the transitional outcome when winning the push order bell, and it is impossible to avoid the winning of the fall replay when winning the replay GR11-16. By shifting to RT1 by stopping the game or winning the fall replay, a series of AT and ART controls are completed.

  Also, after the start of ART, if the lottery conditions (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell win) are met before the remaining number of games reaches 0, it is determined whether or not to increase the number of ART games. Add lottery. When the winning lottery is won, an ART game number lottery for determining the number of ART games is performed, and the number of games won in the ART game number lottery is added to the remaining number of ART games.

  Further, after the start of ART, when the lottery condition (strong cherry winning) is established before the remaining number of games becomes 0, the state shifts to an added state in which the probability that the number of ART games will be added is higher than during ART. Addition state lottery to determine whether or not. And, when the winning state lottery is won, the stop order for winning the special replay when the replays GR11 to 16 are won is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order. It is possible to shift to RT2 by winning a special replay.

  When shifting to RT2 due to winning the added state lottery, the ART is interrupted, and the counting of the number of ART games is also interrupted, and the added state is shifted. The additional state is continued until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, and during that time, in the lottery conditions (in this embodiment, in the internal lottery or the second lottery, all the small roles, replay GR21 Each time the winning of any one of the replays GR22) is established, an extra lottery is performed, and the number of games won in the extra lottery is added to the remaining number of games in the ART. In particular, when red 7-match replay and blue 7-match replay are allowed, that is, when replay GR21 and replay GR22 are won, red 7-match replay and blue 7-match replay are not allowed, that is, others. It is set so that the average number of games won in the lottery is higher than the case where the winning lottery is won. Also, when a blue 7-match replay winning is permitted, that is, when the replay GR 22 is won, a blue 7-match replay winning is not allowed but a red 7-match replay winning is allowed, that is, the replay GR 21 is It is set so that the average number of games won in the lottery is higher than in the case of winning.

  In the added state, until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, the stop order for winning the red 7-match replay and blue 7-match replay is notified by the navigation notification when the replay GR21 and the replay GR22 are won. Therefore, by performing the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, it is possible to win the red 7-match replay and the blue 7-match replay to indicate that the remaining number of games of ART has been added. In addition, when the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, the promotion replay always wins regardless of the reel stop order, and the added state is terminated by shifting to RT0 by the promotion replay winning. Then, the ART control and the counting of the number of ART games are restarted.

  In addition, in the added state, until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, the stop order for winning the middle bell at the time of winning the push order bell is notified, so stop according to the notified stop order By performing the operation, it is possible to reliably acquire eight medals, and it is possible to avoid the stop of the transition and avoid the transition to RT1.

  In addition, the added state is continued until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later during the control of the added state, and the middle stage bell is stopped when the push order bell is won. Even if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the order, and the transition to RT1 occurs, until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, the internal lottery in RT1 When the replays GR1 to 6 are won, the stop order for winning the promoted replay is notified, and when the replays GR11 to 16 are won by internal lottery at RT0, the stop order for winning the special replay is notified. By performing a stop operation in accordance with the stop order, it is possible to return from RT1 to RT2 via RT0. If the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later in the period from the control of the added state to the return to RT2 via RT0 from RT1, the control of the added state is performed. When the control of the ART is restarted and the replays GR1 to 6 are won by the internal lottery in RT1, the stop order for winning the promotion replay is notified and it is possible to shift from RT1 to RT0. is there.

  Further, after the start of ART, if a special combination is won before the remaining number of games becomes 0, the ART is interrupted by the end of RT2, and the counting of the number of ART games is also interrupted accordingly. When a special combination is won during ART, navigation notification is not performed even if the push order bell is won until the special combination wins.

  If the special role is won during ART and the ART is interrupted, the bonus is controlled after the winning special role is won, and the transition is stopped at RT3 after the bonus ends, and RT1 At this time, the AT control is resumed, and the ART is resumed by moving again to RT0 through the preparation state, and the counting of the remaining number of games of the ART is also resumed.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 notifies the stop order in which the middle bell wins by navigation notification when the push order bell is won during ART or in the added state, and ignores the notified stop order. When the stop operation is performed, the upper bell may win and RT0 or RT2 may be maintained, but the transitional outcome may stop and shift to RT1. If the transition is made from RT0 or RT2 to RT1 during ART or in an added state, the added state will end, but the ART will continue, and the number of remaining games in the ART will be decremented by 1 every time one game is completed Similarly, the stop order for winning the promoted replay at the time of winning the replays GR1 to 6 at RT1 is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order to win the promoted replay and from RT1 to RT0. It is possible to migrate.

  In this embodiment, when the middle replay that maintains RT0 at RT0 and the special replay that shifts to RT2, which is more advantageous to the player than RT0, are won at the same time, the stop order in which the middle replay wins and the stop that special replay wins In the case where the order is different from the stop order, and the addition state lottery is not won, the stop order in which the middle stage replay wins is notified by navigation notification to prompt the stop operation in the notified stop order, and RT0 Is supposed to be maintained.

  In such a configuration, even if the stop order for maintaining RT0 is notified by the navigation notification, the stop order for shifting from the notified stop order to RT2 may be specified, and the stop for maintaining RT0 may be specified. In spite of the notification of the order, there is a possibility that the operation is intentionally performed in the stop order in which the process proceeds to RT2.

  In contrast, in this embodiment, RT0 is maintained when the replays GR11 and 12 are won at RT0, when the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0, and when the replays GR15 and 16 are won at RT0. When the stop order for winning the middle stage replay is different from the stop order for winning the special replay that moves to RT2, and when the replays GR11 and 12 are elected at RT0, the stop order for winning the middle stage replay where both RT0s are maintained The order is the same, but when the replay GR11 is won and when the replay GR12 is won, the stop order for winning the special replay that moves to RT2 is different. When the replays GR13 and 14 are won at RT0, RT0 The same applies if Replay GR15 or 16 is won Going on. For this reason, even if the stop order for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained by navigation notification is specified, the stop order for winning the special replay that moves from the stop order to RT2 cannot be specified. Thus, it is possible to prevent the stop order to be shifted to RT2 from being specified when the stop order for maintaining RT0 is notified.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the replays GR11 and 12 are won at RT0, the stop order for winning the middle stage replay where RT0 is maintained is the same, but when the replay GR11 is won and the replay GR12 is Not only does the stop order for winning the special replay to shift to RT2 in the case of winning, but also the stop order for winning the special replay does not match, the fall replay wins and is more disadvantageous for the player than RT0 The same applies to the case where the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won at RT0 and the case where the replay GRs 15 and 16 are won at RT0. For this reason, even if the stop order for winning the special replay is narrowed down by specifying the stop order for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained by the navigation notification, the stop operation is performed other than the notified stop order. As a result, there may be a disadvantage for the player, so that the player can be prompted to stop in the notified stop order.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop order is applied as an operation mode for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained when winning the replays GR11 to 16 and an operation mode for winning the special replay to shift to RT2. The timing of the stop operation may be applied, or a combination of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation may be applied.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained when winning the replays GR11 to 16 and the special replay for shifting to RT2 In addition, although the fall replay wins and shifts to RT1, which is disadvantageous for the player than RT0, the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay in which RT0 is maintained when the replays GR11 to 16 are elected, special shift to RT2 When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode for winning a replay, any display result other than the display result for which a special replay that moves to RT2 wins may be stopped. The display result to be stopped may be configured to stop.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the replay GRs 11 and 12 with the same operation mode for winning the middle stage replay are won, the operation mode for winning the special replay is the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay when the replay GRs 11 and 12 are won. Although it is the same as a part of the operation mode in which special replays are won in different replays GR13 to 16, the special replay is awarded in replays GR13 to 16 in which the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay is different from the winning of replays GR11 and 12. The configuration may be different from the operation mode. Further, when the replay GRs 13 and 14 having the same operation mode for winning the middle replay are won, the replays GR11 and 12 are different from the operation mode for winning the special replay and the operation mode for winning the middle replay when the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won. 15 and 16 are the same as part of the operation mode for winning a special replay, but the replay GRs 11, 12, 15, and 16 have different operation modes for winning a middle stage replay when the replays GR 13 and 14 are selected. The configuration may be different from the operation mode for winning a prize. In addition, when the replays GR15 and 16 having the same operation mode for winning the middle replay are won, the replays GR11 to 14 are different from the operation mode for winning the special replay in the case of winning the replay GR15 and 16 and the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay. Is the same as a part of the operation mode for winning a special replay, but is different from the operation mode for winning a special replay in the replays GR11 to 14 in which the operation mode for winning the middle stage replay is different from the time of winning the replays GR15 and 16. It may be.

  In addition, RT2 is advantageous to the player in that it is more likely to be given benefits advantageous to the player than RT0 in that the number of ART games is likely to be increased. However, for example, a configuration that is advantageous to the player in terms of a high probability of winning a specific combination, a high probability of winning a specific combination, and a high medal payout rate may be used.

  Here, the benefit advantageous to the player means a right that allows the player to shift to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (winning a lottery for determining whether or not to generate the advantageous state, shifting to the advantageous state. (E.g., winning is permitted), the right to be notified of an operation mode advantageous to the player, the right to be controlled to a gaming state with a high expected value to which a gaming value is given, and the current gaming state are advantageous to the player Such as the right to be notified of whether or not the player is in a gaming state, the period during which the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state (the number of fixed games, the average value of the number of games that vary depending on the end condition, etc.) Alternatively, it may be a benefit that is indirectly advantageous to the player, such as a condition for obtaining a privilege on the Internet, although it is not directly advantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, in RT0, the display results for maintaining RT0, the display results for transitioning to RT2, and the display results for transitioning to RT1 are all applied the display results for the re-game player to win. The display result may be a display result in which a small combination wins, or a display result in which no combination wins.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can control the normal state, the CZ1 (chance zone 1) state, the CZ2 (chance zone 2) state, the ART, and the added state as the control state related to the ART. is there.

  The normal state of the control state related to ART is a control state that is controlled first when the gaming state is controlled to RT1, and when the gaming state is the normal state, the lottery condition (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, When the watermelon and common bell wins are established, the ART lottery to determine whether or not to control to ART (state controlled by AT at RT0) and the added state (the number of ART games to be added is high) (A state that becomes a probability) An additional state lottery that determines whether or not to control, and a CZ lottery that determines whether or not to control to CZ1 or CZ2 are performed. In the normal state, the probability of winning the ART in the ART lottery, the probability of winning the added state in the added state lottery, and the probability of winning either CZ1 or CZ2 in the CZ lottery are set as normal probabilities. In addition, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the normal state, any one of the ART lottery, the added state lottery, and the CZ lottery is won, and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (ART lottery, added state lottery, CZ lottery) When the predecessor period set based on having won is passed), the corresponding control state is entered.

  The CZ1 state is started when the CZ1 state is won in the CZ lottery in the normal state and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. When in the CZ1 state, the ART lottery and the added state lottery are performed when the lottery conditions (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell win) are established. In the CZ1 state, the probability of winning the ART in the ART lottery and the probability of winning the additional state in the added state lottery are set higher than the normal state, respectively, and the ART and the added state are won compared to the normal state. It is easy to do. Further, when the number of games after the start of the CZ1 state reaches a predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment), the normal state is entered.

  The CZ2 state is started when the CZ2 state is won in the CZ lottery in the normal state and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. When in the CZ2 state, as in the CZ1 state, when the lottery conditions (in this embodiment, strong cherries, weak cherries, watermelons, and common bell wins) are established, the ART lottery and the extra state lottery are performed. Is called. In the CZ2 state, the probability of winning the ART in the ART lottery and the probability of winning the additional state in the additional state lottery are set higher than the normal state and the CZ1 state, respectively, compared to the normal state and the CZ1 state. It is easier to win ART and add-on status. Further, when the number of games after the start of the CZ2 state reaches a predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment), the normal state is entered.

  ART is started by winning an ART lottery in a normal state, a CZ1 state, and a CZ2 state and satisfying a predetermined transition condition. Alternatively, in the normal state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state, when the added state lottery is won and controlled to the added state, it is started after the end. When it is ART, if the lottery condition (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell win) is established, whether or not to add the remaining number of games of ART and the number of games to be added An extra lottery and an extra state lottery are performed. In ART, the probability of adding one or more games in the extra lottery is set to the normal probability, and the probability of winning the extra state in the extra state lottery is set to a higher probability than the normal state. This makes it easier to win in the added state than in the normal state. In addition, after the ART is started, 1 is subtracted every time the game is played, and when the remaining number of games becomes 0, the normal state is entered.

  In the present embodiment, in ART (RT0), the lottery is performed based on the result of the second lottery in which the game state is RT2, and the internal lottery is performed. However, the same value is set, and the result of the internal lottery regarding the small role and the result of the second lottery are the same result. It does not affect the degree of advantage for the player.

  The added state is started by winning the added state lottery in the normal state, the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, and the ART and satisfying a predetermined transition condition. When in the added state, an additional lottery is performed when a lottery condition (in this embodiment, winning of any small combination, replay GR21, or replay GR22 in the internal lottery or the second lottery) is established. In the added state, the probability that it is decided to add the number of ART games in the added lottery is set higher than that of ART, and it is decided to add the number of ART games compared to ART. It has become easier.

  When it is determined that the main control unit 41 performs lottery (ART lottery, additional state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to shift the control state related to ART and shifts the control state related to ART. In addition, a state transition flag (ART transition flag, additional state transition flag, CZ1 state transition flag, CZ2 state transition flag) that can specify the control state of the transition destination determined by lottery is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When the state transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the main control unit 41 is set so that the type of the state transition flag indicating the selected control state and the number of holdings for each type can be specified in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Can have a plurality of state transition flags regardless of whether they are related to the same type of control state or different types of control state.

  When the control state related to ART is the normal state and is not in the precursor period, the ART transition flag, the additional state transition flag, the CZ1 state transition flag, the CZ2 state transition flag, and the additional state transition flag are set at the start of the game. If at least one of the state transition flags is set, the state transition flag is set when the added state transition flag is set at the start of the game, and when it is not during the precursor period. Set as the state transition flag of the control state to be transitioned next time. In addition, at the start of the game that has shifted to the normal state after the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, and the ART are ended, at least one of the state transition flag of the ART transition flag, the added state transition flag, the CZ1 state transition flag, and the CZ2 state transition flag Is set, the control state having the highest degree of advantage for the player among the set state transition flags (in this embodiment, the degree of advantage is higher in the order of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the added state, and the ART. Is set as the state transition flag of the control state to be transferred next time. Then, a precursor period lottery for determining the number of games to be controlled in the precursor period based on the type of state transition flag set as the state transition flag of the control state to be transferred next time is performed.

  The precursor period of the present embodiment is composed of a basic period (6 games, 16 games, 22 games) and an additional period (sometimes referred to as α; α = 0 game to 3 games). In the period lottery, the basic period is selected according to a predetermined ratio based on the state transition flag that triggered the precursor period lottery, and within a range of 0 to 3 regardless of the control state of the transition destination Randomly select the number of games for the additional period.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the proportion of selecting the precursor period when the CZ1 state is won is 4% for the basic period 6 games, 86% for the 16 games, and 10% for the 22 games, When the CZ2 state is elected, the proportion of selecting the precursor period is 80% for the basic period 6 games, 14% for the 16 games, 6% for the 22 games, and the ART is won in the normal state. The ratio of selecting the precursor period is 2% for the basic period 6 games, 28% for the 16 games, 70% for the 22 games, and when the added state is won in the normal state The proportions for selecting the precursor period are 2% for the basic period 6 games, 4% for 16 games, 96% for 22 games, and select the precursor period when the added state is won during ART Percentage A 80% basic period 6 games, 16 games are 18%, 22 game is 2%.

  In this embodiment, when the control state related to ART is the normal state, the precursor period when the CZ1 state is elected, the precursor period when the CZ2 state is elected, and when the ART is elected The sign period when the sign-up period and the extra state are won can be selected by the sign-period lottery, and the control period of the CZ1 state, CZ2 state, ART, and the add-on state is won in the sign period lottery. Even if the basic period is 6 games, 16 games, or 22 games, it is possible to select any precursor period, so even if any number of basic periods passes during the precursor period, It is possible to suggest the possibility that either control state of the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state is won.

  In addition, when the CZ1 state is won in the normal state, the rate of selection of 16G + α is higher than when the other state is won, and when the CZ2 state is won in the normal state, 6G + α is more likely to be selected than when the state is won, and when other players win the normal lottery or when the ART lottery is won The ratio of 22G + α being selected is higher than in some cases, and the difference in the number of games can indicate a control state that is likely to shift thereafter in the normal state.

  The main control unit 41 has one precursor period counter indicating the number of remaining games in the precursor period in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the number of games that is the sum of the basic period and the additional period selected in the precursor period lottery is the precursor period. The number of games is set in the precursor period counter. Even when the main control unit 41 performs the precursor lottery based on any of the state transition flags of the ART transition flag, the added state transition flag, the CZ1 state transition flag, and the CZ2 state transition flag, the precursor period determined by the precursor lottery By setting the number of games in the one precursor period counter, the RAM 41c also has the precursor period when shifting to the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state, the precursor period when shifting to the ART, and the precursor period when shifting to the added state. Are counted by a common precursor period counter provided in a predetermined area.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 41 decrements the value of the precursor period counter by 1 when the game is started, and determines whether or not the value of the precursor period timer is 0 when the game ends. . When the value of the precursor period counter is 0 and it is determined that the precursor period determined by the precursor period lottery has ended, the control state specified by the state transition flag set as the control state to be transitioned next time is set. A control state related to ART is set, and the state transition flag is released from the RAM 41c. Thereby, at the end of the game in which the precursor period has ended, the control state related to ART is shifted to a new control state, and control based on the control state related to the new ART is performed from the start of the next game. .

  Next, the flow from winning the ART lottery and controlling to ART when the gaming state is RT1 and the control state related to ART is the normal state will be described.

  The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the state transition flag is set at the start of the game when the gaming state is RT1 and the control state related to ART is the normal state and is not in the precursor period. When the ART shift flag is set, the sign period lottery is performed, and after the sign period, when the sign period won in the sign period lottery ends, the ART is controlled.

  When controlling to ART, first control to AT. The state from the start of the AT control to the transition to RT0 is also referred to as a preparation state. The main control unit 41 performs navigation notification when the target combination is won in the preparation state. At this time, in RT1, when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, navigation notification is performed, and when the replays GR1 to 6 are won, the stop order for winning the promoted replay is notified by the navigation notification, so stop according to the notified stop order. By performing the operation, it is possible to shift the promotion replay from RT1 to RT0. In addition, after the transition to the ready state, the stop order for winning the middle bell when the push order bell is won is notified, so that the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order, so that eight medals can be reliably obtained. It becomes possible.

  The main control unit 41 ends the preparation state when the promotion replay wins at RT1, shifts to RT0, and starts ART control. Accordingly, the main control unit 41 sets the predetermined number of games as the number of remaining ART games allocated to the RAM 91c, and starts counting the number of remaining ART games. After the ART starts, the stop order for winning the middle bell when the push order bell is won will be notified, so it is possible to reliably acquire 8 medals by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. At the same time, it is possible to avoid stopping the transition event and winning the fall replay and avoiding the transition to RT1. In addition, when the extra state lottery described later is not won, the stop order for winning the middle stage replay when the replays GR11 to 16 are won is notified by the navigation notification, so the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order. This makes it possible to maintain the RT0 by winning the middle stage replay.

  Further, after the start of ART, every time one game is consumed, the number of remaining games is decremented by 1, and when the remaining number of games becomes 0, the AT control is terminated. As a result, the navigation notification is not executed, so it becomes impossible to avoid the stop of the transitional outcome when winning the push order bell, and it is impossible to avoid the winning of the fall replay when winning the replay GR11-16. By shifting to RT1 by stopping the game or winning the fall replay, a series of AT and ART controls are completed.

  In addition, after the start of ART, if the lottery condition (winning strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is satisfied before the remaining number of games of ART becomes 0, whether or not to add the number of ART games An extra lottery is performed to determine the number of games to be added. When the winning lottery is won, the number of won games is added to the remaining number of games in the ART.

  Further, after the start of ART, when the lottery condition (strong cherry winning) is established before the remaining number of games becomes 0, the state shifts to an added state in which the probability that the number of ART games will be added is higher than during ART. Addition state lottery to determine whether or not. When the added state lottery is won, the added state transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, so that control for shifting to the added state is performed based on the added state transition flag being set. It will be.

  Next, the flow from when the gaming state is RT0 and the control state related to ART is ART to winning the added state lottery and controlling to the added state will be described.

  The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the state transition flag is set at the start of a game that is not in the precursor period when the additional state is won during ART and the additional state transition flag is set. When the added state transition flag is set, the sign period lottery is performed, and after the sign period, when the sign period won in the sign period lottery ends, the added state is controlled.

  In the case of controlling to the added state during ART, the stop order in which the special replay is won at the time of winning the replays GR11 to 16 is notified by the navigation notification after the warning period has elapsed, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order. As a result, a special replay is awarded and the process proceeds to RT2. When shifting to RT2 due to winning the added state lottery, the ART is interrupted, and the counting of the number of ART games is also interrupted, and the added state is shifted. The additional state continues until the promotion replay wins, and during that time any lottery target wins in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, the additional lottery, the number of games won in the additional lottery, Add to the number of remaining games in ART. In particular, when the replay GR21 and the replay GR22 are won, the average number of games to be won in the lottery is set higher than when other lottery objects are won, and when the replay GR22 is won. The average number of games to be won in the lottery is set higher than the case where the replay GR 21 is won.

  In the added state, until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, the stop order for winning the red 7-match replay and the blue 7-match replay is notified by the navigation notification when the replays GR21 to 23 are won. By performing the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, it is possible to win the red 7-match replay, the blue 7-match replay, the missed replay a, and the missed replay b. In addition, when the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery, it is impossible to avoid the promotion replay winning, and the added state is terminated by shifting to RT0 by the promotion replay winning, Restart counting of ART and ART games.

  Also, in the added state, regardless of the gaming state, until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery, the stop order for winning the middle bell at the time of winning the push order bell is notified, so the notification was given. By performing the stop operation in accordance with the stop order, it is possible to reliably acquire eight medals, avoid the stop of the transfer start, and avoid the shift to RT1.

  In addition, the added state is a case where the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the stop order for winning the middle bell at the time of winning the push order bell in RT2, and the transition outcome is stopped and the process shifts to RT1. Even if there is an internal lottery or the second lottery to be described later, the promotion replay is continued until it is won, and when replays GR1 to GR6 are won by internal lottery at RT1, and replayed by internal lottery at RT0 When the GRs 11 to 16 are elected, a stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order, so that RT1 is returned to RT2 via RT0.

  Further, after the start of ART, if a special combination is won before the remaining number of games becomes 0, the ART is interrupted by the end of RT0, and the counting of the number of ART games is also interrupted accordingly. When a special combination is won during ART, navigation notification is not performed even if the push order bell is won until the special combination wins.

  If the special role is won during ART and the ART is interrupted, the bonus is controlled after the winning special role is won, and the transition is stopped at RT3 after the bonus ends, and RT1 At this time, the AT control is resumed, and the ART is resumed by moving again to RT0 through the preparation state, and the counting of the remaining number of games of the ART is also resumed.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 notifies the stop order in which the middle bell wins by navigation notification when the push order bell is won during ART or in the added state, and ignores the notified stop order. When the stop operation is performed, the upper bell may win and RT0 or RT2 may be maintained, but the transitional outcome may stop and shift to RT1. If the transition is made from RT0 or RT2 to RT1 during ART or in an added state, the added state will end, but the ART will continue, and the number of remaining games in the ART will be decremented by 1 every time one game is completed Similarly, the stop order for winning the promoted replay at the time of winning the replays GR1 to 6 at RT1 is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order to win the promoted replay and from RT1 to RT0. It is possible to migrate.

  Note that the main control unit 41 continues the ART control during the precursor period during the ART, thereby executing the navigation notification and subtracting 1 from the number of remaining games of the ART every time one game is consumed. Further, if the remaining number of games in the ART becomes 0 before the sign period ends, the navigation notification is continued until the sign period ends.

  Next, the flow from when the gaming state is RT1 and the control state related to ART is the normal state to winning the added state lottery and controlling to the added state will be described.

  The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the state transition flag is set at the start of the game when the game state is RT1 and the control state related to ART is the normal state and is not in the precursor period, and adds When the state transition flag is set, the precursor period lottery is performed, and after the precursor period, when the precursor period won in the precursor period lottery ends, the added state is controlled.

  In the case of controlling from RT1 to the added state, the control is first performed to the AT as in the case of controlling to the above-mentioned ART. After starting the AT control, the navigation notification is executed when the target combination is won. When the promoted replay wins at RT1, the routine proceeds to RT0. Thereafter, the stop order in which the special replay is won when the replays GR11 to 16 are won is notified by the navigation notification, and the special replay is won by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, and the process proceeds to RT2. And it transfers to a superposition state by having shifted to RT2.

  After shifting to the added state, the added state is terminated by shifting to RT0 by winning the promotion replay when winning the promotion replay in the internal lottery or the second lottery, and then shifting to ART.

  Next, the flow from winning the CZ lottery and controlling to the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state when the gaming state is RT1 and the control state related to ART is the normal state will be described.

  The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the state transition flag is set at the start of the game when the gaming state is RT1 and the control state related to ART is the normal state and is not in the precursor period. When the CZ1 state transition flag is set, the precursor period lottery is performed, and the CZ1 state is controlled when the precursor period won in the precursor period lottery ends after the precursor period. Also, when the CZ2 state transition flag is set, the sign period lottery is performed, and when the sign period won in the sign period lottery ends after the sign period, the CZ2 state is controlled. Then, when the predetermined number of games is completed in the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state, the normal state is entered.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won by winning the special combination in the internal lottery in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When the special role winning flag is not set, each time the game is started, it is determined whether or not it is during the precursor period based on the value of the precursor period counter. While the value of the period counter is decremented by 1 and updated, if it is not in the precursor period, it is determined whether any state transition flag is set, and if the state transition flag is set, A lottery will be drawn to control the precursor period. When the special role winning flag is set, each time the game is started, it is determined whether any state transition flag is set and a precursor period is set. 1 is subtracted and updated, and every time the game is ended, the precursor period counter is reset to 0 regardless of whether or not it is in the precursor period. Based on the fact that the special role winning flag is set, if the predecessor period counter is reset, if the special role is won in the internal lottery during the precursor period and the special role winning flag is set, Based on the fact that the special combination winning flag is set, the precursor period counter is reset, and the precursor period being executed is stopped. In addition, since the predecessor period counter is reset based on the fact that the special combination winning flag is set at the end of the game, the game is played in a state where the special combination winning flag is set, that is, a so-called carryover state. Each time the precursor period counter is reset, the process is repeated.

  And when a special combination wins, it controls to RB and BB which are elected. Thereafter, when the control of RB and BB is finished, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is RT1, and when it is not RT1 (when there is RT3), it waits until the transition to RT1. After that, when transitioning to RT1, the state transition flag is referred to, and if any state transition flag is set, the state transition flag having a higher priority is set as the state transition flag of the control state to be transitioned next time The lottery of the sign period is performed based on the set state transition flag, the sign period is set, the count of the sign period is started, and the value of the sign period counter is decremented by 1 each time the game is started. When the precursor period elapses, the control state is shifted to the control state based on the state transition flag.

  Thus, when the RB and BB are won during the precursor period, the main control unit 41 resets the precursor period counter to 0 based on the fact that the special combination winning flag is set. As a result, the precursor period that was being executed is cancelled. In this case, when the special role based on the elected RB and BB wins, and after the RB and BB are completed, the RT3 is passed to the RT1 after the completion of the RB and BB. , It will be controlled to the precursor period over the set period.

  The main control unit 41 resets the precursor period counter based on the fact that the special combination winning flag is set every time the game is started. Thereby, when RB and BB are elected, in the so-called carry-over state, every time the game is started, a process of resetting the precursor period counter is performed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a special combination winning flag indicating that RB and BB are won in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by winning RB and BB in the internal lottery. Until the RB and BB wins, the special role winning flag is maintained and the so-called carry-over state is maintained. When the RB and BB wins, the special winning flag is cleared and the RB, Control of BB is started. In addition, the main control unit 41 includes a ceiling game number counter for counting the number of games until the RB and BB are won again after the control of the RB and BB is completed, in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When the control of BB is finished, when the game is finished with the RB and special role winning flag carried over, the ceiling game number counter is reset to 0 and the game is started In addition, by adding 1 to the value of the ceiling game number counter, the number of games until the RB and BB wins again after the control of the RB and BB is completed (hereinafter referred to as the number of games between special role winnings). Is).

  Then, at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 refers to the ceiling game number counter to determine whether or not the number of games between special roles has reached a predetermined number of games. When the number of games has reached the specified number of games, an ART transition flag is set as a privilege advantageous for the player, and the ceiling game number counter is reset and set to zero. As a result, the ART transition flag is referred to at the start of the next game, so that the ART is controlled through the precursor period.

  Thus, after adding 1 to the ceiling game number counter set in the RAM 41c at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter has reached the specified number of games. However, if the specified number of games has been reached, the ceiling game number counter is reset after the ART transition flag is set as an advantageous benefit for the player. Even when the value reaches the specified number of games, the player can receive an advantageous privilege.

  In this embodiment, the ceiling game number counter starts counting after the end of RB and BB, and the ceiling game number counter is cleared when RB and BB are won, that is, both RB and BB after the end of RB and BB. The bonus is granted when the number of non-winning games reaches the specified number of games, but the counting of the ceiling game number counter starts after any of RB, BB, or ART, and the ceiling game number counter RB, BB winning, ART transition flag, additional state transition flag is cleared at the time of winning, that is, the number of games that RB, BB, ART and the added state after the end of RB, BB or ART is not won is the specified number of games It is good also as a structure by which a privilege is provided by reaching.

  Next, in relation to being controlled by the main control unit 41 during the precursor period, the precursor effect and the false precursor effect executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the state of the ART when a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell win) is satisfied when the game is started. If it is decided to shift the control state related to ART by performing lottery (ART lottery, extra state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to shift the event, the precursor period determined by the precursor period lottery Set to the precursor period counter. Then, an ART state command that can specify the number of remaining games in the precursor period specified based on the result of the lottery (ART lottery, added state lottery, CZ lottery) and the value of the precursor period counter is sent to the sub-control unit 91. Send to. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can execute a precursor effect, a continuous effect, and a result notification effect when it is specified that the main control unit 41 is controlling the precursor period based on the ART state command. It is.

  The warning effect is executed over the warning period determined by the main control unit 41 when a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, winning of strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, and common bell) is established. . By executing the warning effect, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of being subsequently controlled to any one of ART, the added state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state. Also, in the prelude effect, the effect mode such as the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is different from the normal effect (the effect that is executed in most of the normal states not controlled by the AT). Due to the difference, the player can recognize that the sign production is in progress.

  The continuous effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that one of the ART, the added state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state is won over a plurality of games (3 games in this embodiment), and finally the ART. This is an effect that leads to a result notification for notifying whether one of the added state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state is won. Starting with the next game in which the number of remaining games in the preceding period has reached a predetermined number of games (3 games in this embodiment), at the end of the game in which the number of remaining games in the preceding period has become 0 games, A result notification for notifying whether one of the state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state is won is performed. By executing the continuous performance, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of being controlled to any one of the ART, the added state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29, when a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell win) is established and the CZ1 state is won, the main control unit 41 Then, an ART state command capable of specifying that the CZ1 state is won and the number of remaining games in the precursor period is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In each game during the subsequent warning period, an ART state command that can specify the number of remaining games in the warning period is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Then, the control of the CZ1 state is started from the next game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor period becomes 0, and an ART state command that can specify that the CZ1 state is in progress is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 starts the warning effect in the game during the warning period after the main control part 41 specifies that the warning period has been started based on the ART state command. . Then, in the next game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor period becomes a predetermined number of games (3 games in this embodiment), the continuous production is started, and at the end of the final game of the continuous production, the ART state command A result notification for notifying the lottery result of the CZ1 lottery specified based on the result is performed. And after the main control part 41 transfers to CZ1 state, the production in CZ1 according to CZ1 state is performed. The sign effect may be executed in a game in which the main control unit 41 side is controlled during the sign period, and the sign effect is started from a game in which the main control unit 41 starts controlling the sign period. Even so, it may be started after the next game after the main control unit 41 starts the control of the precursor period.

  29, when a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, winning of strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is established, a sign that the sub-control unit 91 performs when the CZ1 state is won. Although the presentation has been described, the same applies to the case where the CZ2 state other than the CZ1 state, ART, and the added state are won when the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and the main control unit 41 controls the precursor period. The sub-control unit 91 performs a precursor effect in the game during the precursor period based on the ART state command.

  The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs an effect in the same manner as the precursor effect in a period other than the period in which the main control unit 41 executes the control of the precursor period (in this embodiment, six games). (18 games) can be performed.

  The false sign effect is different from the normal effect (the effect executed in most of the normal states not controlled by the AT) in the effect mode such as the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, like the sign effect. Then, the player cannot recognize whether the prelude effect is being performed or the false prelude effect is being performed, and by executing the false predictor effect, the ART is subsequently executed as in the case where the predecessor effect is executed. , The possibility of being controlled to any one of the added state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state is suggested. Further, in the false sign effect, the continuous effect is executed over the last predetermined number of games (3 games in this embodiment), and at the end of the last game of the false sign effect and the continuous effect, the ART, the added state, the CZ1 state A result notification for notifying that none of the CZ2 states has been won is executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), the main control unit 41, when a predetermined lottery condition (winning of strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell in this embodiment) is established, When it is decided not to shift to any control state by lottery (ART lottery, extra state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to shift the control state related to ART performed on the 41 side The control state at the time when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by transmitting an ART state command that can specify that no control state has been won and the precursor period has not been set. continue.

  On the other hand, by determining that it is determined not to shift to any control state based on the ART state command, a false precursor effect lottery that determines whether to execute a false precursor effect is performed . In the false sign effect lottery, it is determined that the false sign effect is executed at a predetermined rate (a rate of 1/3 in this embodiment). When it is determined in the false sign effect lottery that the false sign effect is to be performed, the false sign effect is started in the subsequent game. In addition, the false precursor effect may be any event that starts when a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a watermelon, and a common bell win) is established. The game may be started from the game that has been performed, or may be started from the game after the game that has performed the false sign production lottery.

  After starting the false precursor effect, whether or not to perform a continuous effect over the remaining three games and shift the control state related to ART performed on the main control unit 41 side at the end of the last game of the false precursor effect and the continuous effect After notifying the result of lottery (ART lottery, extra state lottery, CZ lottery) lottery results for determining whether or not, the state returns to the state before the false sign effect is started.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), during the execution period of the false precursor effect on the sub-control unit 91 side, before the continuous effect is executed, the ART, additional state on the main control unit 41 side, When either the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state is won, the sub-control unit 91 stops the false precursor effect, and any one of the ART, the added state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state specified based on the ART state command Starts a prelude production based on winning. After starting the precursor effect, after performing the precursor effect, the continuous effect, and the result notification based on the number of remaining games in the precursor period specified by the ART state command, the control state is shifted to the main control unit 41 side. Perform the corresponding production.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), during the execution of the false precursor effect on the sub-control unit 91 side and during the execution of the continuous effect, on the main control unit 41 side, the ART, the added state, CZ1 If either the state or the CZ2 state is won, the sub-control unit 91 continues the false omen effect and the continuous effect, and performs a result notification (outage) at the end of the last game of the false omen effect and the continuous effect. Then, the false sign production is ended. After that, it is determined that the precursor period is specified based on the ART state command, and the precursor effect is started. Based on the number of remaining games in the precursor period specified by the ART state command, the precursor effect, the continuous effect, and the result notification To perform an effect according to the control state transferred on the main control unit 41 side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can control to a control state related to a plurality of ARTs including an ART, an added state, a CZ1 state, and a CZ2 state which are advantageous game states for the player. Yes, before shifting to these control states, the number of games in the precursor period is set in the precursor period counter and controlled to the precursor state in accordance with the number of remaining games in the precursor period specified based on the precursor period counter .

  In such a configuration, if a configuration is provided in which a precursor period counter is provided for each of a plurality of control state types and the precursor state is controlled according to the number of remaining games of the precursor period set in the precursor period counter, Not only is the control for controlling the period complicated, but a storage area for assigning a plurality of precursor period counters to the RAM 41c is required.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment shifts the control state related to ART when a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, winning of strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, and common bell) is established. When it is decided to perform a lottery (ART lottery, extra state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to shift the control state related to ART, the control state of the transfer destination determined by the lottery is determined. An identifiable state transition flag (ART transition flag, additional state transition flag, CZ1 state transition flag, CZ2 state transition flag) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the precursor period is set based on the state transition flag being set. It is possible to shift to the control state corresponding to the state transition flag when the precursor period has passed, and based on which state transition flag Even when the precursor period is set, the precursor period is set in common with one precursor period counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, so that control for identifying the precursor period according to the set state transition flag is performed. While simplifying, the capacity | capacitance of the storage area for memorize | storing precursor information can be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can set the CZ1 state transition flag and the CZ2 state transition flag as predetermined state transition flags in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the control state related to ART is the normal state, CZ1 When the precursor period is set based on the state transition flag being set and the precursor period has elapsed, it is possible to transition to the CZ1 state, and when the control state related to ART is the normal state Based on the fact that the CZ2 state transition flag is set, it is possible to set the precursor period, and to transition to the CZ2 state when the precursor period has elapsed, and the CZ1 state transition flag is set. Both the precursor period to be set based on the fact and the precursor period to be set based on the fact that the CZ2 state transition flag is set are both the RAM 41c. Since it is set in common for one precursor period counter provided in the predetermined area, the control for specifying the precursor period according to the set state transition flag can be simplified, and a storage area for storing precursor information Capacity can be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can set the CZ1 state transition flag and the CZ2 state transition flag as predetermined state areas in the RAM 41c as the state transition flag when the control state related to the ART is the normal state. When the control state is the normal state, the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag is set, so that the precursor period is set, and the CZ1 state that is set when the precursor period has elapsed It is possible to shift to the control state corresponding to the transition flag and the CZ2 state transition flag, and when the control state related to ART is ART, the additional state transition flag can be set as a state transition flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When the control state is ART, based on the addition state transition flag being set, , And when the preceding period has elapsed, it is possible to shift to the added state, and when the control state related to ART is the normal state, the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag is set The precursor period that is set based on whether the added state transition flag is set when the control state related to ART is ART is also one precursor period counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for specifying the precursor period according to the set state transition flag, and to reduce the capacity of the storage area for storing the precursor information.

  In the configuration in which the main control unit 41 shifts to the first specific state when at least the first transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to the second specific state when the second transition condition is satisfied. A precursor period that is controlled before the transition to the first specific state after the first transition condition is satisfied, and a precursor period that is controlled before the transition to the second specific state after the second transition condition is satisfied, If it is set to a common counter and counts the precursor period, the control to specify the precursor period according to the specific state to be transferred can be simplified, and the capacity of the storage area for storing the precursor information can be reduced. can do.

  In such a configuration, the first specific state and the second specific state are not limited to the state where the ART winning probability is high, such as the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state in this embodiment, and are advantageous to the player. A state in which an advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) can be won and the winning expectation degree is different, a state advantageous to a player such as AT, ART, etc., in which the advantage is different, or a specific condition In a configuration where the number of established times (game digestion, winning of a specified role, winning of a specified role, etc.) is controlled to an advantageous state by reaching a specified number of times, The number of prescribed times is reduced, the number of established times is increased more than usual, etc., and the degree thereof may be different, or any two of the plurality of states may be applied. It may be. The advantageous state is the probability that a display result advantageous to the player is derived, the probability that the display result advantageous to the player is allowed to be derived, and the probability that a privilege advantageous to the player is given from the normal state. Or an operation mode for deriving a display result that is advantageous to the player is notified, and so on. Further, in a configuration that is advantageous for the player by achieving the task by the end of the predetermined state, this predetermined state, that is, a state that is advantageous for the player by increasing the period is applied as the advantageous state. Also good.

  Further, the main control unit 41 shifts to the specific state when the specific transition condition is satisfied at least in the first state, and shifts to the special state when the special transition condition is satisfied in the second state. A precursor period that is controlled before transitioning to the specific state after establishment of the specific transition condition in the state of 1, and a precursor period that is controlled before transitioning to the special state after the establishment of the special transition condition in the second state; It is only necessary to set a common counter and count the precursor period. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control for specifying the precursor period according to the specific state to be transferred, and The capacity of the storage area for storing can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets the precursor period as a predetermined number of games. However, the precursor period may be other than a period based on the number of games, and a predetermined combination (for example, It may be the number of times (re-playing combination) is won, the number of games in which no combination is won, or the like.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a precursor period set based on the CZ1 state transition flag being set and a precursor period set based on the CZ2 state transition flag being set. In the precursor period lottery, the length of the precursor period is selected based on the CZ1 state transition flag and the length of the precursor period based on the CZ2 state transition flag. Since the length of the easy-to-select period differs in the case of selection, the period of an appropriate length is different between the precursor period based on the CZ1 state transition flag and the precursor period based on the CZ2 state transition flag. Can be controlled over the precursor period.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when the control state is the normal state, the precursor period set based on the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag being set, and the control state is ART. In this case, the precursor period set based on the addition state transition flag being set is determined by the precursor period lottery. In the precursor period lottery, the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state is determined. Since the length of the easy-to-select period differs between the case where the length of the precursor period is selected based on the transition flag and the case where the length of the precursor period is selected based on the added state transition flag, the CZ1 state Appropriate length periods for the precursor period based on the transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag and for the precursor period based on the additional state transition flag It is possible to control the aura period over.

  Note that the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment selects any of the precursor periods of 6 games + α, 16 games + α, and 22 games + α, regardless of which state transition flag is used to determine the precursor period. Possible configurations, i.e., the length of the precursor period that is controlled before transitioning to the CZ1 state, the length of the precursor period that is controlled before transitioning to the CZ2 state, the length of the precursor period that is controlled before transitioning to the ART, and the addition The length of the precursor period to be controlled before transitioning to the state is determined to be in the overlapping range, but the main control unit 41 determines the precursor period to be determined according to the type of state transition flag as the state transition. It is good also as a structure which does not overlap as a period of a different range for every kind of flag. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that any control state of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the ART, and the added state is won depending on the number controlled in the precursor period.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can control the control state related to ART to a control state including a normal state, a CZ1 state, a CZ2 state, an ART, and an added state. Can be shifted to another control state, and the sub-control unit 91 is configured to be able to control effects based on various commands transmitted from the main control unit 41, and the main control unit 41 transmits, to the sub-control unit 91, an ART state command that can specify the number of remaining games in the precursor period when the control state is shifted, and the sub-control unit 91 performs the precursor period based on the ART state command. Since the sign effect which shows that there is, the control load of the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the control state related to ART to a control state including a normal state, a CZ1 state, a CZ2 state, an ART, and an added state. The main control unit 41 is configured to be able to control the production based on various commands transmitted from the control unit 41, and the main control unit 41 has predetermined lottery conditions (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, When the common bell) is established, an ART state in which a lottery (ART lottery, extra state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to shift the control state related to ART is performed and the lottery result can be specified Since the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the sub-control unit 91 can specify whether or not the lottery is won based on the ART state command. Then, when it is specified that the lottery for determining whether or not to shift the control state related to the ART is determined based on the ART state command, the sub control unit 91 produces the same effect as the sign effect. In the aspect, a false precursor effect lottery that determines whether or not to perform a false precursor effect over a predetermined period is performed, and when the false precursor effect lottery is won, the false precursor effect is executed, so the control load on the main control unit 41 is reduced be able to.

  Note that the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode such as the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as the sign effect and the false sign effect in the normal effect (most of the normal states not controlled by the AT). The sub-control unit 91 is different in the content of the effect, such as making the background displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 different as a precursor effect or a false precursor effect. It is possible to recognize whether it is a precursor effect or a false precursor effect from at least a difference in the effect aspect, such as a structure in which the production frequency is different, a structure in which an effect that is easy to be executed is different, etc. Any configuration is acceptable.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment transmits an ART state command that can specify whether or not to control in the precursor period to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on the ART state command. When it is specified on the main control unit 41 side that it is not controlled in the precursor period, it is determined whether to execute the false precursor effect at a predetermined rate, and false if it is determined to execute the false precursor effect. The sub-control unit 91 manages whether to execute the warning effect, that is, whether or not to execute the false warning effect. The main control unit 41 determines whether or not to execute the false warning effect. The configuration may be such that the sub-control unit 91 executes the false precursor effect when the control unit 41 determines to execute the false precursor effect.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment starts the sign effect in the game during the sign period after it is determined that the main control unit 41 starts the control of the sign period based on the ART state command. However, the precursor effect may be executed when the main control unit 41 is controlling during the precursor period, and the sub-control unit 91 starts the control of the precursor period by the main control unit 41. In the played game, it may be configured to start the sign effect. In such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 sets the period for executing the warning effect in any game during the warning effect, the ART, the added state, as in the warning period lottery performed by the main control unit 41. It is good also as a structure which can suggest the possibility that any control state of CZ1 state and CZ2 state is elected.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment updates the precursor period counter for counting the number of remaining games in the precursor period when shifting the control state related to ART by subtracting 1 at the start of the game, and at the end of the game If the number of games remaining in the precursor period is zero based on the value of the precursor period counter, it is determined that the precursor period has ended, so whether the precursor period based on the precursor period counter has been updated and the precursor period has ended Since the determination of NO is not performed at the same time, it is possible to reliably determine whether the precursor period has ended based on the updated precursor period counter.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can hold a plurality of state transition flags, and when controlling during the precursor period, that is, when at least one state transition flag is set. When a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell win) is established, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift the control state related to ART (ART lottery, When the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the ART, or the added state is won, a state transition flag that can specify the selected control state is further set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Even when other transition conditions are satisfied during the precursor period, the CZ1 state, CZ2 state, ART, It can be shifted to put state.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can hold a plurality of state transition flags, and when holding a plurality of different types of state transition flags, it is the most advantageous for the player. Since control is performed in the precursor period based on the state transition flag so that control is given priority over the high control state, even if other transition conditions are satisfied during the precursor period, multiple transitions are established without complicating the processing. It is possible to shift to a control state having the highest advantage for the player according to the conditions.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can hold a plurality of state transition flags. When a plurality of different state transition flags are held, the main control unit 41 is most advantageous to the player. Is configured to control in the precursor period based on the state transition flag so as to preferentially control the higher control state, but the main control unit 41 holds a plurality of different types of state transition flags, For example, the state transition flag may be controlled based on the selected state transition flag by selecting the state transition flag of the next transition state based on a criterion other than the player's advantage. The state transition flag of the control state to be transitioned to next is selected according to the order in which the Those selected may be used to select the state transition flag by lottery based on the predetermined ratio.

  When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment holds a plurality of any one of the CZ1 state transition flag and the CZ2 state transition flag, the main control unit 41 transitions to the normal state after the CZ1 state or CZ2 state ends as the release condition. When the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag is held, and the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag is retained. Alternatively, when the CZ2 state ends and the normal state is entered, control is performed during the precursor period based on the CZ2 state transition flag so as to control the CZ2 state, which is highly advantageous for the player, so that control is performed during the precursor period. Even if other transition conditions are satisfied, the CZ1 state or the CZ1 state can be changed depending on the transition conditions that are satisfied, without complicating the processing. It can be shifted to the state.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is held when shifting to the normal state as the release condition when holding a plurality of any one of the ART shift flag and the added state shift flag. It is advantageous for the player when shifting to the normal state as the release condition when controlling in the precursor period based on the ART transition flag or the additional state transition flag and holding both the ART transition flag or the additional state transition flag Since control is performed in the precursor period based on the additional state transition flag so as to give priority to control of the higher additional state, even if other transition conditions are satisfied during the precursor period, multiple processes can be performed without complicating the process. The state can be shifted to ART or an added state according to the established transition condition.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is held when the CZ1 state transition flag or the ART transition flag is held in a plurality, and is shifted to the normal state as the release condition. It is advantageous for the player when shifting to the normal state as the release condition when the CZ1 state transition flag or the ART transition flag is controlled based on the CZ1 state transition flag or the ART transition flag and both the CZ1 state transition flag and the ART transition flag are held. Since the control is performed in the precursor period based on the ART transition flag so as to preferentially control the high-level ART, even if other transition conditions are satisfied during the precursor period, a plurality of conditions are satisfied without complicating the processing. It is possible to shift to the CZ1 state or ART depending on the transition condition.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is held when the CZ2 state transition flag or the ART transition flag is held in plural and the state is shifted to the normal state as the release condition. It is advantageous for the player when shifting to the normal state as the release condition when the CZ2 state transition flag or the ART transition flag is controlled based on the CZ2 state transition flag or the ART transition flag and both the CZ2 state transition flag and the ART transition flag are held. Since the control is performed in the precursor period based on the ART transition flag so as to preferentially control the high-level ART, even if other transition conditions are satisfied during the precursor period, a plurality of conditions are satisfied without complicating the processing. It is possible to shift to the CZ2 state or ART depending on the transition condition.

  When the control state related to ART is the normal state, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can set the additional state transition flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and based on the fact that the additional state transition flag is set. When the precursor period is set and the precursor period has elapsed, it is possible to shift to the added state, and when the control state related to ART is ART, the added state shift flag can be set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Yes, it is possible to set the precursor period based on the addition state transition flag being set, and to transition to the addition state when the precursor period has elapsed, and the control state related to ART is the normal state Sometimes, even when the precursor period is set based on the added state transition flag, when the control state related to ART is ART, Even when the precursor period is set based on the riding state transition flag, the precursor period is set in common with one precursor period counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, so that the precursor corresponding to the set state transition flag is set. The control for specifying the period can be simplified, and the capacity of the storage area for storing the precursor information can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs lottery (ART lottery, extra state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to shift the control state related to ART, and decides to shift the control state related to ART. In this case, the sign period lottery that determines the period to be controlled in the precursor period before shifting the control state related to ART is performed. In the precursor period lottery, the ratio is determined in advance according to the control state to be shifted. Since the basic period of the precursor period is selected, a predetermined additional period (0 to 3 games) is selected using a random number, and the sum of the additional periods with respect to the basic period is determined as the number of games in the precursor period. Thus, the length of the precursor period can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment calculates the sum of the basic period selected based on a predetermined ratio and the additional period selected using a random number, and determines the number of games in the precursor period. However, the calculation method of the precursor period is not limited to the sum of the basic period and the additional period. For example, the precursor period is calculated by subtracting a predetermined period from the basic period, and the basic period is multiplied by a predetermined value. Alternatively, the precursor period may be calculated by division (for example, basic period × 0.8 to × 1.2), or the precursor period may be calculated by combining these operations.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment calculates the sum of the basic period selected based on a predetermined ratio and the additional period selected using a random number, and determines the number of games in the precursor period However, the main control unit 41 may be configured to select one period based on a predetermined ratio from a plurality of periods determined in advance and determine the number of games in the precursor period. A configuration may be adopted in which one value is selected using a random number from a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 25 games), and the number of games in the precursor period is determined. The number of games in the period can be varied within a predetermined range, and the length of the precursor period can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the special combination is won in the internal lottery. Until the RB and BB corresponding to the winning flag wins, the special role winning flag is held, and when it is determined to shift the control state related to ART, the predetermined precursor period is set as the precursor period counter. It is configured to control the precursor period based on the value of the precursor period counter, and when the special combination is won in the internal lottery, the precursor period counter is reset and the special combination winning flag is set Based on that, every time the game is played, the precursor period counter is reset, so that in the state that the special role winning flag is carried over, It can be prevented from being your.

  In the present embodiment, when the BB or RB wins during the precursor period, the main control unit 41 cancels the executing precursor period, and when the BB or RB wins, After starting the control of RB and completing the control of BB and RB, control is performed again from the beginning in the precursor period. However, if BB or RB is elected during the precursor period, A configuration may be adopted in which control is performed so that the interrupted precursor period is resumed when the control of the selected BB and RB is terminated.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the BB or RB wins during the precursor period, the main control unit 41 cancels the executing precursor period, and when the BB or RB wins, After starting the control of RB and finishing the control of BB and RB, it is configured to start the control of the precursor period on condition that the gaming state is RT1, but after the control of BB and RB is finished, Even when the state is not RT1, the control of the precursor period may be started on condition that the state transition flag is set when the control of BB and RB ends.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 adds 1 to the ceiling game number counter set in the RAM 41c at the start of the game, and a special combination winning flag indicating that a special combination is won is set. Since the ceiling game number counter is reset at the end of the game when the game is in progress, if the state where the special role winning flag is set is maintained, the ceiling game is The number counter is updated (added by 1) and reset repeatedly, so there is no need to provide a process for updating the ceiling game number counter depending on whether or not the special role is being carried over. It is possible to execute processing related to updating the ceiling game number counter without increasing the capacity.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 updates the ceiling game number counter set in the RAM 41c every time a game is played, and whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter has reached the specified number of games. If the specified number of games has been reached, an ART transition flag is set as an advantageous benefit for the player, and if the special role is won, the ceiling game number counter is reset to zero. . In such a configuration, when the value of the ceiling game number counter reaches the prescribed number of games in the game in which the special role is won, the ceiling game number counter is reset in the game in which the special role is won. Therefore, there is a possibility that a privilege advantageous to the player is not given. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, after adding 1 to the ceiling game number counter at the start of the game, determines whether the value of the ceiling game number counter has reached the specified number of games, When the specified number of games has been reached, the ceiling game number counter is reset after setting the ART transition flag as a privilege advantageous to the player. Therefore, the value of the ceiling game number counter in the game won by BB or RB Even when the prescribed number of games is reached, the player can receive an advantageous privilege.

  In this embodiment, after the BB or RB control is finished, when the number of games until the special combination is won has reached the specified number of games, an ART state transition flag is provided as an advantageous benefit for the player. However, benefits that are advantageous to the player are not limited to the ART state transition flag, but are rights that allow the player to enter a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (whether or not an advantageous gaming state is generated). Winning a lottery to determine whether or not, a winning to shift to an advantageous gaming state is allowed, etc.), a right to be notified of an operation mode for deriving a display result advantageous to a player, and a gaming value It may be a privilege that is directly advantageous to the player, such as a right to be controlled to a gaming state with a high expected value, and is not directly advantageous to the player. Such as a condition for obtaining the benefits on Tsu door, it may be indirectly advantageous benefits for the player.

  Also, in this embodiment, after the BB or RB control is finished, the number of games until the special role is won is counted by the ceiling game number counter, and the value of the ceiling game number counter reaches the prescribed number of games. It is a configuration that gives a privilege that is advantageous to the player on the condition that it is a condition, but the condition that gives a privilege that is advantageous to the player is a game until the special role is won after the BB or RB ends The number of games is not limited to the specified number of games, but may be configured on condition that the number of games from the end of ART control until the winning of ART or the added state has reached the specified number It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of games until the winning of the BB, RB, ART, and the added state has been reached after the control of the BB, RB, ART is completed may be a condition. .

  Next, the control content of the internal winning command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery subject, and a lottery subject that may be carried over, that is, a special winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special role is set, A lottery target that is not carried over, that is, a general winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general winning is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the special role winning number table, when no special role is won, that is, the winning winning number is “0”, the winning number of BB is “1”, The winning number is assigned “1”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in the general combination winning number table, “0” is set as the winning number when none of the general winning combinations is won, that is, in the case of losing, and the winning number of the normal replay is “1”. "Is the winning number for replay GR1," 2 "is the winning number for replay GR2," 3 "is the winning number for replay GR3, and" 5 "is the winning number for replay GR4. The winning number of the replay GR5 is “6”, the winning number of the replay GR6 is “7”, the winning number of the replay GR11 is “8”, and the winning number of the replay GR12 is “9”. The winning number for GR13 is "10", the winning number for replay GR14 is "11", the winning number for replay GR15 is "12", and the winning number for replay GR16 is "13", which is replay GR21. Winning numbers, "14", winning numbers of replay GR22 is, "15", winning numbers of replay GR23 is, "16", winning numbers of the promotion replay, "17" has been assigned. In addition, “20” is assigned to the winning number of the strong cherry, “21” is assigned to the winning number of the weak cherry, and “22” is assigned to the winning number of the watermelon. The winning number for left bell 1 is “23”, the winning number for left bell 2 is “24”, the winning number for left bell 3 is “25”, and the winning number for left bell 4 is “ “26” is the winning number of the middle bell 1, “27” is the winning number of the middle bell 2, “28” is the winning number of the middle bell 3, “29” is the winning number of the middle bell 4 , “30” is the winning number for right bell 1, “31” is the winning number for right bell 2, “32” is the winning number for right bell 3, “33” is the winning number for right bell 4 “34” is assigned as the number, and “35” is assigned as the winning number of the common bell.

  As described above, in the special combination winning number table and the general combination winning number table, the lottery subject for internal lottery and the winning number are set correspondingly.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes an internal lottery process when a start operation is performed, and when any of the special combination and the general combination is won in the internal lottery The winning number corresponding to the lottery subject for which the winning is determined is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if no winning combination is won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared at the end of one game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the selected special role is won by winning Cleared.

  After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes an internal winning command setting process, and based on the internal winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the timer interruption process (main) thereafter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, in the internal winning command setting process, first, the winning number of the special role set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sf1), and the acquired winning number is displayed. The transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of 2 bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). When storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, 41 stores MODE indicating that the first internal winning command is in the first byte, and winning for sending the special role in the second byte EXT. Stores the number.

  In the step of Sf3, after storing the first internal winning command, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sf4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. It is determined whether there is (Sf5), less than 14 (Sf6), less than 23 (Sf7), and less than 35 (Sf8). It is determined which of a plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in a predetermined range.

  If it is determined in step Sf5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, if the winning number is 0 or 1, the acquired winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). If it is determined in step Sf5 that the winning number is not less than 2 and it is determined that the winning number is less than 14 in step Sf6, that is, if the winning number is one of 2 to 13, 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). If it is determined that the winning number is not less than 14 in step Sf6 and is less than 23 in step Sf7, that is, if the winning number is any of 20 to 22, the winning number is The winning number for transmission is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). If it is determined in step Sf7 that the winning number is not less than 23 and it is determined in step Sf8 that it is less than 35, that is, if the winning number is any of 23 to 34, the winning number for transmission is used. 23 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). If it is determined in step Sf8 that the winning number is not less than 35, that is, if the winning number is 35, the winning number is set as a transmission winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9).

  Then, after setting the general winning transmission winning number in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps Sf9, Sf10, and Sf11, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmitting winning number. When storing the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating that it is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and plays a general role in the second byte of EXT. Stores the winning number for transmission.

  After the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue in step Sf10, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  Thus, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the special role set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the winning number for transmission, and the first including the winning number for transmission is included. Set the internal winning command in the command queue.

  Further, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 14 to 22, 35). In this case, the winning number is set as the transmission winning number, and the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. Thereby, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 14 to 22, 35) is set in the internal winning, The winning number by internal lottery can be specified based on the winning number for transmission included.

  On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2-13), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmitting winning number, and the transmitting winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. Thereby, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range (2 to 13) is set in the internal winning, the winning number for transmission included in the command is transmitted. On the other hand, it is not possible to specify whether the winning number is in the second predetermined range (2-13), while the winning number is in the second predetermined range (2-13) It is possible to identify a certain thing.

  Further, when the winning number is within the third predetermined range (23 to 34), one winning number (23) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmitting winning number, and the transmitting winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. Thereby, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range (23 to 34) is set in the internal winning, the winning number for transmission included in the command is transmitted. On the other hand, it is impossible to specify which of the numbers in the third predetermined range (23 to 34) the winning number is, while the winning number is in the third predetermined range (23 to 34). It is possible to identify a certain thing.

  The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment are then executed by the timer interrupt process (main), so that the sub-control unit 91 Are sequentially transmitted.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91. However, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data A form may be used. In this embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to transmit a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91. Although the configuration includes a winning number for transmission in the byte, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal winning command, the second internal winning command Each winning command is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the configuration in which the winning number for sending a special role or the winning number for sending a general role is included in the third byte, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. It may be configured by one signal composed of 3 bytes, and a transmission number for special role transmission may be included in the second byte, and a transmission number for general role transmission may be included in the third byte.

  In the present embodiment, the winning numbers of the special roles corresponding to the types and losing of the special roles (BB, RB) in the special role winning number table are divided and assigned separately. The general control winning number is set in the general winning number table, and the winning number of the general winning is set according to the type and deviation of the general winning, and the main control unit 41 determines the winning number of the special winning and the general The winning number of the winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, but the winning number is assigned without being divided into the special winning role and the general winning role, for example, “BB”, “small role”, “BB + winning simultaneously. A configuration may be adopted in which a winning number is assigned to each of the small combinations (for example, BB + strong cherry or the like shown in FIG. 19) as one drawing target combination. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special combination and the small combination are selected based only on the one winning number. It is possible to perform predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc.).

  Next, the control content of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32, 34 and 35. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, navigation numbers (0 to 9) that can identify the stop order of reels by navigation notification are assigned in advance, and among the lottery target combinations, the notification target combination is assigned a navigation number for each type. A navigation number table in which navigation numbers for each type of lottery object combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 34, as the navigation number, 0 indicating the standard pushing order (in this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop), the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop, that is, the left first 1 indicating 1 stop, stop order in which the middle reel 2C is the first stop, ie, 2 indicating middle first stop, stop order in which the right reel 2R is the first stop, ie 3, indicating right first stop, and first stop The left reel 2L, the second stop is the middle reel 2C, the third stop is the right reel 2R, and the stop order is 4, the first stop is the left reel 2L, the second stop is the right reel 2R, and the third stop is the middle reel 2C. 5 indicates a stop order, 6 indicates a stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the left reel 2L, and the third stop is the right reel 2R, and the first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop. 7 indicates the stop order, with the right reel 2R and the third stop the left reel 2L. Stop is right reel 2L, second stop is left reel 2L, third stop is middle reel 2C, 8 indicates the stop order, first stop is right reel 2R, second stop is middle reel 2C, and third stop is left 9 indicating the stop order for the reel 2L is set.

  In this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is stopped first is applied as the standard push order specified by the navigation number 0. However, the standard push order is disadvantageously advantageous for the player. As long as they are in a standard push order, other stop orders may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the navigation number table, a navigation number is set for each type of notification target combination among lottery target combinations, and for left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, and left bell 4. "1" is for the middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, and middle bell 4, and "2" is "3" for the right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, and right bell 4. "Is set for replay GR1," 5 "for replay GR2," 6 "for replay GR3," 7 "for replay GR4, and replay GR5 “8” is set to “9” for the replay GR6.

  In addition, for replay GR11-16, a navigation number is set according to the winning situation of the above-described extra lottery. When the extra lottery is not won, navigation number 1 is set for replay GR11 and replay GR12. For replay GR13 and replay GR14, navigation number 2 is set, for replay GR15 and replay GR16, navigation number 3 is set, and when the addition lottery is won, navigation number is set for replay GR11 and replay GR16. 2 is set for the replay GR12 and the replay GR13, and the navigation number 1 is set for the replay GR14 and the replay GR15.

  In addition, a navigation number is not set for the normal replay, replay GR 21 to 23, promotion replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, and common bell that are not notification target roles among the lottery target roles.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 wins the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the start operation is performed and when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. A push order command setting process for setting a push order command corresponding to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the push order command setting process, first, after acquiring the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process (Sg1), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c Whether or not the navigation notification is performed (when the navigation notification is performed during AT or non-AT) with reference to a predetermined flag indicating whether the navigation notification is set or not Is determined (Sg2). If it is determined in step Sg2 that the navigation notification is not performed, whether or not the winning combination to be stopped on the winning line LN is confirmed based on the stop status of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the result of the internal lottery. (Sg5), and if the winning combination is not confirmed in the winning line LN, the standard navigation number (0 in this embodiment) is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sg6).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the navigation notification is in the state at step Sg2, or when it is determined at step Sg5 that the winning combination to be stopped on the winning line LN is determined, it is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. With reference to the navigation number table (see FIG. 32), the navigation number corresponding to the winning number of the general combination acquired in step Sg1 is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, if it is specified that the replays GR1 to GR6 are winning based on the internal winning numbers, the stop order in which the combination of the promotion replays is stopped on the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. The navigation number shown is set as the transmission navigation number. In addition, when it is specified that the replays GR11 to 16 are won and it is specified that the winning lottery is not selected, the combination of the middle replays is selected in the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. A navigation number indicating the stop order to be stopped is set as a transmission navigation number. Further, when it is specified that the replays GR11 to 16 are winning and it is specified that the winning lottery is selected, the combination of special replays is selected in the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. A navigation number indicating the stop order to be stopped is set as a transmission navigation number.

  In addition, when it is specified that the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 are elected based on the internal winning numbers, the middle bell A navigation number indicating a stop order in which the combination is stopped on the winning line LN is set as a transmission navigation number.

  After the transmission navigation number is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Sg3 or Sg6, the push order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sg4). When storing the push order command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the push order command in the first byte, and stores the transmission navigation number in EXT of the second byte.

  After the push order command is stored in the command queue in step Sg4, the push order command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  Thus, when the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process, which is advantageous for the player when the navigation notification is being executed. If a command for pressing the order that can specify the stop order is set in the command queue and the navigation notification is not being executed, it is impossible to specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player, and this is a standard that is disadvantageous and advantageous for the player. A command for specifying the order of pressing is set in the command queue.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs a push order command setting process every time a stop operation is performed, so that even when the navigation notification is not being executed, the main control unit 41 stops at the winning line LN. Is determined, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is set in the command queue.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is a case where, for example, the replay GR1 is won in a state where the gaming state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed by executing the push order command setting process. When none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the promotion replay and the middle stage replay can be stopped, but it is not determined which combination will be stopped, so the standard navigation number (“0”) Is set as the transmission navigation number, and a push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. In addition, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the promotion replay and the middle replay can still be stopped, and it is not determined which combination will stop, so the standard navigation number ("" 0 ") is set. When the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the promoted replay can be stopped by the subsequent stop of the right reel 2R, and the combination to stop is confirmed. Therefore, even when navigation notification is not performed, a navigation number ("4") that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player (stop order for winning the promotion replay) is the transmission navigation number. Is set. When a reel other than the left reel 2L is stopped in the first stop, after the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and when a reel other than the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, the subsequent stop Regardless of the order, only the middle stage replay can be stopped, and the combination to be stopped is fixed. Therefore, even when navigation notification is not performed, a navigation number (“ 4 ") is set as the transmission navigation number.

  In addition, when the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed and the replays GR2 to 6 are elected, as in the case where the replay GR1 is elected, any role of promotion replay or middle stage replay is played. When it is not determined whether to stop, a push order command including a standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and it is advantageous for the player when it is determined which role of promotion replay or middle replay stops. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify a specific stop order is set.

  In addition, for example, when the game state is RT0, no navigation notification is performed, and the replay GR11 is won, and when none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the middle stage replay, special replay, Although the fall replay can be stopped, it is not determined which combination will be stopped, so the standard navigation number ("0") that cannot specify the stop order of the replay GR11 is set as the transmission navigation number. The push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, only the middle stage replay can be stopped, and the combination to stop is fixed. Therefore, even if the navigation notification is not performed, the stop advantageous to the player A navigation number (“2”) that can specify the order (stop order in which special replays are won) is set as the transmission navigation number. In addition, when the middle reel 2C is stopped as the first stop, it is determined that only the special replay is stopped. Therefore, a navigation number ("2") that can specify a stop order advantageous for the player is used for transmission. When the right reel 2R is stopped as the first stop and the right reel 2R is stopped, it is determined that only the fall replay is stopped. Therefore, a navigation number ("2") that can specify a stop order advantageous for the player. ) Is set as the transmission navigation number.

  In addition, when the game state is RT0 and navigation notification is not performed and the replay GR12 to 16 is won, any of the middle stage replay, special replay, and fall fall replay is performed in the same manner as when the replay GR11 is won. When it is not determined whether the combination will stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and it is determined which combination of middle replay, special replay, and fall replay will stop In addition, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player (stop order in which a special replay is won) is set.

  Further, when the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4 are elected in a state where the navigation notification is not performed, the middle bell is treated similarly to the case where the replays GR 1 to 6 are elected. When it is not determined which combination of the upper bells 1 to 8 is stopped, a push order command including a standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and when any combination is determined to be stopped A push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player (stop order for winning the middle bell) is set.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 does not control the AT, and when the notification target role is won, the main control unit 41 determines the stop order that is advantageous to the player at the timing determined for the player. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The timing at which an advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice role (replay GR11 to 16 in the push order replay), and the six-choice role (replay GR1 to 6). Then, it is the timing when the first stop operation is performed and it is determined that the winning combination advantageous to the player is not stopped, or the second stop operation is performed.

  The push order commands set in the push order command setting process of this embodiment are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt process (main) thereafter.

  When the sub control unit 91 specifies that the navigation notification is being performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the push order command, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command described above. In addition, a navigation effect is performed. When the sub control unit 91 performs the navigation effect, the winning of the notification target role is specified based on the second internal winning command, and the navigation number is other than “0” based on the push order command. That is, when it is specified that the pressing order advantageous to the player is other than the standard pressing order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a stop order image indicating the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the pressing order command. To display. In the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image that suggests a role that may be won based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, when the push order bell is elected as the notification target role, by displaying the image of “bell”, it is possible to win the push order bell, and the push order replay is won. If there is, the type of replay GR that may be won is identified based on the gaming state (RT0 to RT3) on the main control unit 41 side identified based on the gaming state command or the like, and the identified replay Suggesting the possibility of winning a winning combination that is advantageous to the player by performing an action according to the combination included in the GR (for example, promotion replay in replays GR1 to 6 and special replay in replays GR11 to 16) Can be done.

  Moreover, as an effect according to the combination included in the replay GR in the navigation effect, for example, even when the replay GRs 11 to 16 are won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command transmission process on the main control unit 41 side, the second internal “2” indicating the winning of any one of the replays GR 1 to 6 and 11 to 16 is uniformly set as the winning number for sending the winning command, but the sub-control unit 91 sets the second internal winning command to Based on the fact that the winning number for transmission is “2” and that the gaming state is RT1 based on the gaming state command or the like, it is specified that the replay GRs 11 to 16 are winning. A special replay can be won by an operation according to the stop order along with an image showing the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the push order command. By displaying an image that suggests (in this embodiment, an image showing a combination of symbols constituting a special replay), among the roles included in the replays GR11 to GR16, a role advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, It is possible to produce an effect in accordance with the role transferred to RT2 at the time of winning the extra state lottery.

  Next, the control contents of the winning determination command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this embodiment, a winning number (0 to 55) is assigned in advance for each type of winning combination for the special combination and the general combination, and a winning number table in which a winning number is set for each type of winning combination is a predetermined number in the ROM 41b. Stored in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 14, a winning number is assigned for each type of winning combination, that is, for each combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN, and “Replay a-Cherry a-Cherry a” in the upper bell 1 is “ “1” is “Replay a-Cherry a-White 7”, “2” is “Replay a-Cherry a-BAR”, “3” is “Replay a-Cherry b-Cherry a” “4”, “Replay a-Cherry b-White 7” is assigned “5”, “Replay a-Cherry b-BAR” is assigned “6”, and “Replay a-Cherry a- “Plum” is assigned “7”, “Replay a-Cherry b-Plum” is assigned “8”, “Replay a-Plum-Cherry a” of the upper bell 3 is assigned “9”, “Replay a -"Plum-White 7", "10" is "Replay a “Plum-BAR” is assigned “11”, “Replay a-Plum-Plum” in the upper bell 4 is assigned “12”, and “Replay b-Cherry a-Cherry a” in the upper bell 5 is “13” is “Replay b-Cherry a-White 7”, “14” is “Replay b-Cherry a-BAR”, “15” is “Replay b-Cherry b-Cherry a” “16” is assigned to “Replay b-Cherry b—White 7”, “17” is assigned to “Replay b-Cherry b-BAR”, and “18” is assigned. “-Plum” is assigned “19”, “Replay b-Cherry b-Plum” is assigned “20”, “Replay b-Plum-Cherry a” of the upper bell 7 is assigned “21”, “Replay” b-Plum-White 7 ”is“ 2 "Is," replay b- plum -BAR "is," 23 "is assigned," replay a- plum of the upper bell 8 - plum "is," 24 "has been assigned.

  The middle bell “Bell-Bell-Bell” is assigned “25”, and the right-down bell “Replay a-Bell-Red 7” is “26” and “Replay a-Bell-Replay a”. “27”, “Replay b-bell-red 7” are assigned “28”, and “Replay b-bell-replay a” are assigned “29”.

  In addition, “30” is assigned to “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” of the middle stage watermelon, and “31” is assigned to “bell-watermelon-cherry b” of the right-down watermelon. In addition, “Red 7-Bell-Bell” of Corner Cherry 1 is assigned “32”, and “33” is assigned to “BAR-Bell-Bell”. “34” is assigned to “a”, and “35” is assigned to “BAR-Bell-Replay a”.

  As shown in FIG. 15, “Replay a-Replay a-Replay a” in the middle stage replay is assigned “36”, and “Replay b-Replay a-Replay a” is assigned “37”. “Bell-Replay a-Red 7” is assigned “38”, “Belle-Replay a-Bell” is assigned “39”, and “Bell-Replay a-Replay a” is “40” for the promoted replay. , "Bell-Red 7-Cherry a" in the fall replay is "41", "Bell-Red 7-Watermelon" is "42", "Bell-Red 7-Plum" is "43" “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry a” is “44”, “Bell-Watermelon-Watermelon” is “45”, “Bell-Watermelon-Plum” is “46”, “Bell-Cherry” “a-Cherry a” is “47” but “Bell-Cherry a- “48” is assigned to “squid”, “49” is assigned to “bell-cherry a-plum”, and “50” is assigned to “replay b-replay” for “replay a-replay a-bell”. “a-bell” is assigned “51”.

  Also, “52” is assigned to “Replay b-Blue 7-Replay a” of red 7-match replay, “53” is assigned to “Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay a” of blue 7-match replay, “54” is assigned to “replay a-blue 7-replay a” of missed replay a, and “55” is assigned to “bell-blue 7-replay a” of missed replay b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, “64” is assigned to “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7” of BB, and “65” is assigned to “Blue 7-Red 7-Red 7” of RB. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 responds to the combination of symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped after the start operation is performed. A winning determination process for determining whether or not a winning has occurred is executed. In the winning determination process, for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped, and the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped. If it is determined, the winning number table is referred to, and the winning number corresponding to the combination of symbols constituting the stopped winning combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, while the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination is set. Is determined not to stop, “0” indicating a loss is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process is terminated.

  Then, after executing the winning determination process, the main control unit 41 executes a winning determination command setting process for setting a winning determination command capable of specifying the winning number in the command queue.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the winning determination command setting process, a winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the winning determination result in the winning determination process (Sh1), and the winning determination command is based on the winning number. Is stored in the command queue (Sh2), and the winning determination command setting process is terminated. When storing the winning determination command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in EXT of the second byte.

  The winning determination command set in the winning determination command setting process is then sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interruption process (main).

  As described above, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the winning determination command setting process, sets the winning determination command including the winning number, A winning determination command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  In the winning determination command setting process of the present embodiment, a winning determination command including the winning number set in the RAM 41c in the winning determination process is set in the command queue, so that a special command or the like that can specify the winning number is used. The processing load can be reduced without performing the conversion process.

  In the present embodiment, since a winning number is assigned for each type of winning combination and stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning determination command including the winning number is based on the winning number. Thus, it is possible to specify a combination of symbols stopped on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and execute an effect.

  A conventional slot machine has a configuration including a game control unit that controls a game and an effect control unit that controls an effect. The game control unit displays an internal lottery result when a predetermined notification target role is won. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not to control to the AT in which the navigation notification for notifying the operation procedure of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is executed. Regardless of whether or not the AT is controlled by the AT, the internal winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit, and the effect control unit specifies the internal lottery result based on the internal winning command and controls the game. In the case where the AT is controlled by the AT, the navigation effect is generated to notify the operation procedure advantageous to the player based on the specified internal lottery result.

  In such a configuration, the effect control unit can identify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. In this way, although the game control unit has not decided to control the AT, an operation procedure advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is identified from the internal winning command, and the operation procedure is There is a possibility of being notified by the production control unit.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the first internal winning command and the general combination that can specify the winning situation of the special role as the internal lottery result as the internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A second internal winning command that can identify the winning status is set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, it is controlled by the AT. Regardless of whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but in general, it is not possible to specify a stop order advantageous to the player Since the second internal winning command related to the combination is set, the second internal winning command changes to the internal lottery result regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. A common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT without specifying an advantageous stopping order for the next player, so that the second internal winning command can be transmitted. This process can be simplified, and even if fraud is made on the side of the sub-control unit 91, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect without being controlled by the AT.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to notify the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, by navigation notification according to the notification target combination won by internal winning. The control unit 41 provides an operation mode operated at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode operated in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation mode based on a combination thereof by navigation notification. Even in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 specifies that the notification target role has been won regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Although the second internal winning command is set on the sub-control unit 91 side by setting the second internal winning command so that an operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified. Advantageous operation mode is not be identified for the player in accordance with the internal lottery result from de.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 performs internal lottery in the internal winning command setting process. When the result becomes a notification target combination, a second internal winning command is set so that it can be specified whether the notification target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell. Therefore, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination, it is possible to specify whether the notification target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell on the sub-control unit 91 side. It is also possible to perform different presentations depending on the type of notification target combination.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls to the AT, and in the state where the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, the stop order advantageous for the player is specified. A push order command setting process for setting a push order command that can be performed is executed and the set push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the player on the side of the sub-control unit 91 in the state where the navigation notification is executed is performed. It is possible to perform a navigation effect that informs of an advantageous stop order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the push order command setting process. When the internal lottery result becomes the push order replay in the state of being played, and when the push order bell is reached, that is, in the state where the navigation notification is executed, the notification target roles won in the internal lottery are different types. However, when the stop order advantageous for the player is common, the push order command including the common navigation number that can specify the stop order advantageous for the player is set, so the types of push order commands can be reduced. it can.

  Further, in the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies a stop order that is advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role in a state in which navigation notification is executed. While a push order command including a navigation number that can be set is set, in a state other than a state where navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, it is not possible to specify a stop order advantageous to the player Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first left stop) is set, the result of the internal lottery becomes the notification target regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is executed. Sometimes, a process for setting a push order command including a navigation number can be shared.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R step by step every time the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. The order is determined before the operation of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, that is, the third stop operation is completed. For example, when the push order bell is won, the first stop operation is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not the middle bell can be won, and when the replays GR11 to 16 are won, the first stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the special replay can be won, and the replay When GR1 to GR6 are won, the second stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the promotion replay is awarded, and the main control unit 41 sets the push order command. In the process, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, a stage in which a stop order advantageous to the player is determined, that is, the first stop and second stop operations are performed. After being performed, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal winning result is set and transmitted, so that even if the sub-control unit 91 is fraudulent, In accordance with whether or not the sub-control unit 91 is operated in the order of stop advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, while preventing the stop order advantageous for the player to be specified Production can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the notification target combination is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. Is set, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous for the player is set, and the push order command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. However, a command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player after the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed and the stop combination is determined is different from the push order command. For example, it is advantageous for the player based on the type of the winning notification target role by sending another command including the winning number of the notification target role won in the internal lottery. It may be configured to allow identifying stop order, separately may be configured to provide a command containing identifiable navigation ID favorable stop order for the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and then, when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, the stop order advantageous to the player. By setting the process for setting a command that can specify the command, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to execute the push order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is performed, After the winning combination to be stopped is determined, every time the pressing order command setting process is performed, a pressing order command capable of specifying a stopping order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination is determined may be transmitted at least once when the winning combination is determined. The configuration may be such that the push order command setting process is not executed after the push order command that can specify the stop order advantageous to the user is transmitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a load related to transmission of a push order command by the main control unit 41.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a push order command setting process when an internal lottery is performed and a stop operation is performed on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in a state in which navigation notification is performed. However, when the navigation notification is in the state, the push order command setting process may be executed only when the internal lottery is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a load related to transmission of a push order command by the main control unit 41 in a state where navigation notification is performed.

  When the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs an internal lottery, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning number set. The internal winning flag is set, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc. are performed, and the winning status of the special role is determined as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A first internal winning command that can be specified and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of the general role are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The winning number when the notification target combination is won as an internal winning result is a predetermined numerical range (the winning number of the push order replay as the notification target combination is 2 to 2). 3 and the winning number of the push order bell is 23 to 34.) is assigned, and the internal winning command setting process is controlled by the AT and the navigation notification is executed. In a state other than the above, when the winning number set in the RAM 41c is within the predetermined numerical range (2-13, 23-34), it is possible to specify that it has been notified, but it is advantageous for the player Since the second internal winning command whose order cannot be specified is set and the set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, it is determined whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Regardless, since the stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is not specified from the second internal winning command, the AT is controlled by the AT even if a fraud is made on the sub-control unit 91 side. Advantageous stop order for the player can be prevented from being informed by the navigation performance with no state.

  In addition, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 indicates that the internal lottery result is the notification target combination. Whether or not the winning number used in performing the predetermined control is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination, and therefore the second internal winning command is transmitted. Can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay, In other words, the internal lottery results are assigned consecutive numbers in the first numerical range (2 to 13) as the winning numbers of the lottery target roles of replays GR1 to 6 and replays GR11 to 16, and the internal lottery results are displayed in the push order bell. As the winning numbers of the lottery target roles of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4, the internal lottery results are in the second numerical range (23 to 34). Since consecutive numerical values are assigned, the main control unit 41 determines whether the winning number is in the first numerical value range or the second numerical value range when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination. Depending on the internal lottery result Or is a push order replay, because it can determine whether the push order bell, can be simplified processing for setting the second internal winning command in internal winning command setting process.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a first state (RT0, RT1, RT2) and a second state (for example, RT1 or RT2 as the first state, RT1 as the first state, It is possible to control to a plurality of gaming states (RT0 to 4, RB) including RT0 or RT2 for RT1 and RT0 or RT1 for RT2 as the first state. The types of push order replays as notification target roles determined in the internal lottery are different (in this embodiment, for example, in RT0, replays GR11 to 16 are lottery target roles, while replays GR1 to 6 are lottery target roles. Rather, in RT1, replay GR1-6 is a lottery target role, while replay GR11-16 is not a lottery target role, in RT2, replay GR1-6, replay GR 1-16 is not a lottery target, but in the game state RT0-2, the type of the notification target role that is the target of internal winning is different), and the internal lottery result is pushed forward in the first game state The winning number when the internal lottery result is the push replay when the game state is the second state and the winning number when the game state is the second state are all assigned to the first numerical range (2 to 13). Therefore, in the internal winning command setting process, a process for determining whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order replay in both the first state and the second state can be shared.

  Further, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment responds to the internal lottery result when the internal lottery result is a role other than the notification target role or in a state where it is not controlled by the AT. When the second internal winning command including the winning number (0 to 1, 14 to 22, 35 in the present embodiment) is set and the internal lottery result is the push order replay which is the notification target role, When one winning number (2 in this embodiment) included in the numerical range (2 to 13) is included and the internal lottery result is a push order bell that is a notification target combination, the second numerical range (23 to 34) ), A second internal winning command including one winning number (23 in the present embodiment) is included, so that the internal lottery result is a notification target role in a state where it is not controlled by the AT. Is also subject to notification Since the second internal winning command including the winning number corresponding to the internal lottery result is transmitted even if the internal lottery is out of or no, the second internal winning regardless of whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target role Processing to create and send commands can be shared.

  In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines whether the notification target combination is used when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. Although it is possible to specify that it has been won, it is configured to set the second internal winning command related to the general role so that it is not possible to specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player, but when it is not controlled by the AT When the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination, the fact that the notification target combination has been won can be specified, but the second internal winning related to the general combination so that the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified While the command is set and the state is controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the winning number corresponding to the type of the notified notification target combination, for example, the push order When the replay GR 11 is won as a ray, the winning number is “8”. When the middle bell 1 is won as a push order bell, the second internal winning command including the winning number “27” is set to control the AT. In this state, the second internal winning command that can identify the type of the notified role to be notified may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, it is possible to specify a stop order advantageous for the player according to the type of the role to be notified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. The control unit 91 can notify the stop order advantageous for the player by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery subject in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. For example, when the replay GR11 is won, an effect suggesting the possibility of a special replay included in the replay GR11 winning can be performed.

  Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the push order command setting process and transmit the push order command, and is controlled by the AT by adopting such a configuration. In the state, from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, it is possible to specify the stop order advantageous for the player according to the type of the role to be notified, and the sub-control unit 91 side sets the stop order advantageous for the player. While being able to notify by a navigation effect, the load concerning transmission of the push order command by the main control part 41 can be reduced.

  The winning number for the push order replay and the winning number for the push order bell need only be set in a continuous numerical range, and the first numerical range in which the winning number for the push order replay is set and the push order. The second numerical value range in which the winning number of the bell is set may be continuous. Even in such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination, and the winning number used when performing predetermined control is the notification target combination. Since the determination can be made based on whether or not the value is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the process, the process for transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified.

  Further, in this embodiment, 1 to 35 are assigned as the winning numbers for the general combination, and the winning numbers for the push order replay that is the notification target combination are continuously set in the first numerical range (2 to 13). The winning number of the push order bell that is the notification target combination is continuously set in the second numerical range (23 to 34), and the winning numbers of the non-notifying target combination are the first numerical range and the second numerical range. However, it may be configured such that the winning numbers of all the non-notification target roles are continuously set in the third numerical value range. By adopting such a configuration, whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the second internal winning command, and determine whether the winning number assigned to the non-notifying subject combination is within a predetermined numerical range. The processing to be performed can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, in the internal winning command transmission process, regardless of the gaming state, the same type of notification target role group (in this embodiment, push order replay group, push order bell For each group, the same winning number for transmission (in this embodiment, “2” for the push order replay group and “23” uniformly for the push order group) is set. The second internal winning command including the credit winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command transmission process, the group of notification target roles to which the same winning number for transmission is set is at least Regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, it can be specified that the notification target role is won, but the stop order advantageous to the player is specified. For a group of the same type of notification target combination that is a lottery target in one gaming state, a plurality of combinations are included so that each group includes one advantageous role for the player. It is good also as a structure which divides | segments into a group and sets the different winning number for transmission for every divided group. As a result, it is possible to specify on the sub-control unit 91 side whether or not a notification target combination belonging to any one of a plurality of groups has been won, and to perform an effect corresponding to the specified group.

  Next, main lottery related processing in which the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes lottery based on random values such as internal lottery and extra lottery at the start of the game will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is activated when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, performs an initial setting process, and then performs a process step by step according to the progress of the game for each game unit. Execute main processing. In the main process, a process for starting the game is executed when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, and based on the random number value for internal lottery latched simultaneously with the start of the game by detecting the operation of the start switch 7. Main lottery related processing for performing lottery processing.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in the main lottery-related process, first, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the game state (RT0 to 4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is acquired, and the acquired game state Is set in another predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a game state for internal lottery (Si01). Then, an internal lottery process (internal lottery) for performing an internal lottery based on the game state for internal lottery set in the step of Si01 is executed (Si02). In the internal lottery process, as will be described later, whether or not each combination is won based on a random number value for internal lottery using a determination value (see FIGS. 19 to 21) corresponding to the game state for internal lottery. In accordance with the result of the determination, a winning number (see FIG. 28) that can specify that the winning combination or none of the winning combinations has been determined is set in a predetermined winning number area of the RAM 41c. Then, the process returns to the main lottery related process.

  After returning from the internal lottery process (internal lottery) in the step of Si02 to the main lottery related process, the winning number set by the internal lottery process is copied and backed up to a predetermined separate area other than the winning number area in the RAM 41c. (Si03).

  Thereafter, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, whether or not the gaming state (RT0 to RT4) acquired in the step of Si01, that is, the gaming state when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is RT0 or RT1. Is determined (Si04). If it is determined in the step of Si04 that the gaming state (RT0 to RT4) is RT0 or RT1, the gaming state for internal lottery set in the step of Si01 is changed to RT2 (Si05) Then, the internal lottery process (second lottery) is executed again (Si06). In the internal lottery process (second lottery), using the determination value corresponding to RT2 (see FIG. 19 to FIG. 21), the winning combination or any combination is not won, similarly to the internal lottery of Si02 ( The winning number (see FIG. 28) that can specify the result is set in the winning number area of the RAM 41c, and the process returns to the main lottery related processing.

  Thereby, when the gaming state (RT0 to 4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is RT0 or RT1, the gaming state (RT0 to 4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. And the second lottery when the game state is set to RT2.

  In addition, the internal lottery process executed to perform the internal lottery in Si02 and the internal lottery process executed to perform the second lottery in the step of Si06 are processes by the program of the same module included in the game program. It is. In addition, the winning number specified by the internal lottery process (internal lottery) and the internal lottery process (second lottery) is set in the same winning number area of the RAM 41c in both processes. By performing the process (second lottery), the data set in the winning number area of the RAM 41c is reset to the winning number specified by the second lottery.

  After returning from the internal lottery process (second lottery) in the Si06 step to the main lottery-related process, or in the Si04 step, if it is determined that the gaming state (RT0 to 4) is not RT0 or RT1, the step of Si07 To determine whether or not the vehicle is in the AT state, that is, whether or not the vehicle is in the state where the navigation notification is performed. Is determined to be in ART or in an added state (Si08, Si09).

  When it is determined that the ART control state is ART in the step of Si08, the process proceeds to the step of Si13, and based on the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a result of the second lottery of the step of Si06. Then, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) of the extra lottery in ART is won. If it is determined in the step of Si13 that any of the lottery target roles has been won, an additional lottery process is executed (Si14), and the remaining number of games of ART is calculated based on the probability according to the type of the winning role. Whether to add or not and the number of games to be added are determined. After executing the additional lottery in the step of Si14 or when it is determined in the step of Si13 that the lottery subject of the additional lottery is not won, the ART control state is maintained (Si15), and the step of Si16 is performed. move on.

  In addition, in the internal lottery, the determination values of the strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, and common bell among the lottery target roles in the extra lottery are set to the same value regardless of the gaming state (see FIGS. 19 to 21). Even if the game state for internal lottery is changed to RT2 in the step of Si05 and the second lottery is performed and the extra lottery is performed based on the winning number according to the result, the internal lottery is virtually in the extra lottery. It is the same as the case where the extra lottery is performed based on the winning number based on the result of.

  If it is determined that the ART control state is not ART in the Si08 step, and it is determined in the Si09 step that the ART control state is in the added state, the process proceeds to the Si10 step, and the second lottery of the Si06 step is performed. As a result, based on the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, whether or not the winning lottery (the strong cherry, the weak cherry, the watermelon, the common bell, the replay GR21, and the replay GR22) of the extra lottery in the extra state is won Determine whether. In the step of Si10, if it is determined that any lottery target combination has been won, the process proceeds to the step of Si14, and an extra lottery process is executed. After adding the lottery in the Si14 step, the ART control state is maintained (Si15), and the process proceeds to the Si16 step.

  Further, if it is determined in the step of Si10 that no lottery target part has been won, the promotion replay is performed based on the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a result of the second lottery in the step of Si06. It is determined whether or not is won (Si11). If it is determined that the promotion replay is not won in the Si11 step, the process proceeds to the Si15 step, the ART control state is maintained, and the process proceeds to the Si16 step. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion replay is won in the Si11 step, the ART control state is set to ART (Si12), the added state is terminated, and the process proceeds to the Si16 step.

  If it is determined that the AT is not in the step of Si07, if it is determined that the control state related to ART is not in the added state in the step of Si09, after setting the control state of ART to ART in the step of Si12, or in the step of Si15 After the ART control state is set to be maintained, the winning number backed up in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Si03, that is, the winning number specified by the internal lottery process (internal lottery) of the Si02 is used as the winning number of the RAM 41c. The area is reset (Si16), the main lottery related process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  In this embodiment, when a special role is won and the process shifts to RT4, the AT control is interrupted so that navigation notification is not performed. After the special role is won, the special role is won. When the transition is stopped at RT3 after the bonus to be controlled is over and the transition to RT1 is resumed, the AT control is resumed, that is, when the gaming state is RT3, RT4, Since AT control is not performed, if the gaming state at the start of the game is RT3 or RT4, it is determined that the AT is not in progress at the step of Si07, and processing related to the extra lottery (steps of Si08 to Si15) The process proceeds to the step of Si16 without performing.

  As described above, in the main lottery-related processing of this embodiment, the gaming state (when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected) regardless of the gaming state (RT0 to 4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected ( An internal lottery based on RT0-4) is executed. If the gaming state (RT0 to RT4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is RT0 or RT1, the gaming state regardless of the gaming state when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The second lottery is executed when RT2 is set to RT2. Further, when the control state related to the ART is an additional state, the additional lottery is performed based on the winning number specified by the internal lottery or the second lottery with the gaming state being RT2. Further, when the control state related to ART is the added state, it is determined whether or not the promotion replay is won based on the winning number specified by the internal lottery or the second lottery with the gaming state being RT2, and the promotion is promoted. When the replay is not won, control is performed so as to continue the added state. On the other hand, when the promotion replay is won, control is performed so that the additional lottery is completed.

  Further, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment controls the added state as described above, and when the gaming state is RT2, it is determined that the promotion replay has been won in the internal lottery based on RT2. In this configuration, the game state is continuously controlled in the added state, and when the game state is shifted to a state other than RT2 due to an erroneous operation of the player, etc., the game state is returned to RT2. In this way, navigation notification is performed when a predetermined notification target is won. In such a configuration, when the added state is controlled, it is determined whether or not an additional number of ART games is given as a benefit based on the fact that the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won in the internal lottery. Then, it will be determined whether or not the conditions for the addition are satisfied based on the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the gaming state other than the gaming state RT2 in the case of controlling to the added state normally. On the other hand, after the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs the second lottery with the gaming state as RT2 when the gaming state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2. If controlled to the added state, an additional lottery will be performed based on the winning of the replay GR 21 or 22 in the internal lottery or the second lottery performed as RT2, and an additional number of ART games will be given as a privilege It is supposed to be.

  Further, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment controls the added state as described above, and when the gaming state is RT2, it is determined that the promotion replay has been won in the internal lottery based on RT2. In this configuration, the game state is continuously controlled in the added state, and when the game state is shifted to a state other than RT2 due to an erroneous operation of the player, etc., the game state is returned to RT2. In this way, navigation notification is performed when a predetermined notification target is won. In such a configuration, whether or not the promotion replay, which is the termination condition of the added state, is won based on the lottery result of the internal lottery after the game state is shifted to a state other than RT2 although it is controlled to the added state. Is determined based on the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the gaming state other than the gaming state RT2 when normally controlling to the added state. It will end up. On the other hand, after the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs the second lottery with the gaming state as RT2 when the gaming state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2. In the case of controlling to the added state, it is determined whether or not to end the added state based on the fact that the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery performed as RT2.

  Next, the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the main control unit 41 in the main lottery related process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the internal lottery process, first, a game state for internal lottery is acquired with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj01), and the initial value of the lottery target combination corresponding to the game state is stored in the RAM 41c. (Sj02). Thereafter, the random number value for internal lottery latched when the start switch 7 is detected is acquired and set in the random number value area of the RAM 41c (Sj03).

  Then, based on the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 19 to 21), the determination value of the lottery object combination is acquired (Sj04), and the acquired determination value is added to the value of the random value area in the RAM 41c (Sj05). It is determined whether or not the result, that is, the value of the random number value area after adding the determination value has overflowed (Sj06).

  If it is determined in step Sj06 that the addition result has not overflowed, whether or not it has been determined whether or not the addition result has overflowed by adding the determination values for all the lottery targets corresponding to the gaming state Is determined (Sj07). If it is determined in step Sj07 that determination has not been made for all the lottery object combinations, the lottery object combination is updated (Sj08), the process returns to step Sj04, and the remaining lottery object combinations Control for determining whether or not the addition result has overflowed is repeatedly executed by adding the determination value corresponding to the lottery target combination to the value in the random number value area.

  If it is determined in step Sj06 that the addition result has overflowed, the process proceeds to step Sj10, where the winning number corresponding to the lottery target when the adding result overflows is acquired, and the winning number is stored in the RAM 41c. Set to area. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj06 that the addition result has not overflowed and it is determined in step Sj07 that all lottery targets have been determined, the process proceeds to step Sj09, where the winning number is not the same. “0” shown is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  In step Sj09 or step Sj10, after setting a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the main lottery related process.

  Thus, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the internal lottery gaming state set in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c before the internal lottery process is called, and the internal latched when the start switch 7 is detected. The winning combination of the internal lottery is specified based on the random number value for the lottery, and a winning number that can specify the winning combination is set in the winning number area of the RAM 41c.

  Next, with regard to the stop mode when the main control unit 41 stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the control state related to the ART is the added state, and the effect mode of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91, FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the main control unit 41 sends, to the sub-control unit 91, a game state command that can specify a gaming state and an ART state command that can specify a control state related to ART at the start of the game. Send. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the gaming state is RT2 based on the gaming state command, and specifies that the control state related to ART is the added state based on the ART state command. In this case, the effect mode of the liquid crystal display 51 or the like is controlled to the effect state of the added state (in the present embodiment, a message indicating that it is in the added state is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51).

  In addition, the main control unit 41 transmits an internal winning command that can specify the result of the internal lottery to the sub-control unit 91 at the start of the game, and the lottery is performed according to the result of the internal winning or the second lottery. In the case of the change, an ART lottery result command that can specify the result of the extra lottery is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. On the other hand, when the control state related to the ART is in the added state, the sub-control unit 91 determines that any of the replay GRs 21 to 23 has been won based on the internal winning command. An extra lottery suggestion effect that suggests winning of the replay GR21 and the replay GR22, which are the lottery target roles, is executed. In the extra lottery suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), by performing a stop operation according to a predetermined stop order (in this embodiment, stop order of right middle left), a red 7-match replay and a blue 7-match replay are performed. , An image (in this embodiment, “red 7”, “blue 7”, an image of a left-pointing arrow) suggesting that the player can win a prize is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a red 7-equal replay according to the predetermined stop order, A stop operation is prompted at the timing when the blue 7 complete replay can be completed.

  Thereafter, the player performs a stop operation on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that the main control unit 41 performs a reel operation in a stop mode according to the result of the internal lottery and the stop operation, as shown in FIGS. Control to stop 2L, 2C, 2R.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), when the replay GR 21 is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 performs a stop operation at a timing at which red 7-matched replays can be arranged in the order of stopping in the middle right and left. When it is performed, each reel is stopped and controlled so that the combination of red 7 matching replays stops on the winning line LN, and the red 7-red 7-red 7 symbol combination is applied to the invalid line LM2. Align. When the replays GR21 and 22 where the red 7-match replay can win are selected, an extra lottery is executed and the number of ART games is always added, so the combination of red 7-match replay symbols is added to the winning line LN. Is stopped, the main control unit 41 notifies that it has been added.

  On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes an extra suggestion effect that suggests an extra lottery result in the game. In the additional suggestion effect, the effect mode is received at the start of the game by controlling the effect mode to the notification mode 1 (in this embodiment, the mode of displaying the characters “+ 100G !!!!” indicating the additional number of ART games). The number of extra games specified based on the ART lottery result command is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the result of the extra lottery.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), when the replay GR 22 is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 performs both the red 7-match replay and the blue 7-match replay in the right middle left stop order. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the blue 7-match replay can be aligned, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of the blue 7-match replays stops on the winning line LN, and the invalid line LM4 is set. Align the pattern combination of “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7”. In addition, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which only red 7-match replays can be aligned in the stop order of right middle left, each reel is controlled to stop so that the combination of red 7-match replays stops on the winning line LN. Then, the combination of symbols “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned with the invalid line LM2. When the replay GRs 21 and 22 that can win the blue 7-match replay and the red 7-match replay are selected, an additional lottery is executed, and the number of ART games is always added, so the red 7 match on the winning line LN. When the combination of symbols of replay or blue 7-match replay is stopped, the main control unit 41 notifies that it has been added.

  On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes the extra suggestion effect, and the effect mode is notified in the notification mode 1 (this In the embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 informs the result of the extra lottery by controlling the mode to display a character “+ 300G !!!!” indicating the extra number of ART games.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the main control unit 41 configures red 7-match replay and blue 7-match replay in the middle stop order when the replay GRs 21 and 22 are selected in the internal lottery. After the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbols to be stopped can be stopped, the red reels are aligned at a timing at which the symbols constituting the red 7-match replay and the blue 7-match replay cannot be stopped for the left reel. When a replay or blue 7-match replay is missed, each reel is controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols of the replay a is missed on the winning line LN. In addition, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), when the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the stop order of the right middle left, When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the red 7-match replay and the blue 7-match replay cannot be completed at the time of the first stop even in the stop order, each reel so that the combination of symbols of the middle replay stops on the winning line LN. Control to stop.

  On the other hand, if the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won in the internal lottery, the sub-control unit 91 will recognize all the reels 2L, 2C, When 2R is stopped, an additional suggestion effect is executed, and a notification mode 2 different from the notification mode 1 in the display mode (in this embodiment, the character “+ 300G” indicating the additional number of ART games is displayed. By controlling to (mode), the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the result of the extra lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the replay GR 23 is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 configures red 7-match replay and blue 7-match replay in the middle right stop order. When a stop operation is performed at a timing at which a symbol can stop on the winning line LN, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols of the replay b is dropped on the winning line LN. When the replay GR 23 is won in the internal lottery, the stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbols constituting the red 7-match replay and the blue 7-match replay cannot be stopped on the winning line LN in the order of stopping in the middle right. When the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the right middle right stop order, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols in the middle stage replay is stopped on the winning line LN, although not shown.

  On the other hand, when the replay GR 23 is won in the internal lottery, the sub-control unit 91 executes an extra effect when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped and has not been added. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment controls the added state by winning a predetermined combination (promotion replay) in the second lottery when the control state related to ART is the added state. Terminate. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 controls the added state when a predetermined combination (promotion replay) is won in the second lottery on the main control unit 41 side and the added state may be terminated. An end possibility suggesting effect that suggests the possibility of being terminated is executed. Moreover, although there is no possibility that the added state is terminated on the main control unit 41 side, when the normal replay is won in the internal lottery and the false effect lottery is won, the false end possibility suggesting effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), when the promotion replay is won as a predetermined combination in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41, together with the gaming state command and the ART state command, at the predetermined An internal winning command that can specify that the combination (promotion replay) has been won is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In contrast, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the gaming state is RT2 and the control state related to ART is the added state based on the gaming state command and the ART state command. In the case where it is determined that a predetermined combination (promotion replay) has been won based on the internal winning command, the end possibility suggesting effect is executed. In the end possibility suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), together with an image suggesting a combination of symbols of a predetermined combination (promotion replay), the predetermined combination is stopped by stopping on the winning line LN. A message suggesting that the control is terminated is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Thereafter, the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that the main control unit 41 stops the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay on the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 42 (b). Each reel is stopped and controlled. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 executes the added state end notification effect when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and displays an image that suggests that the added state control is ended. The information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the end of the added state.

  Further, when the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the normal replay is won based on the internal winning command when the ART control state is specified to be the added state based on the ART state command. When the lottery effect lottery is executed and the lottery is won, a false end possibility suggestion effect is executed. In the false end possibility suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an image similar to the end possibility suggesting effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, suggesting the possibility that the control of the added state is ended. To do.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), when the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the main control unit 41 stops the combination of symbols in the middle stage replay on the winning line LN. Each reel is stopped and controlled. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display an image indicating that the control of the added state is continued without being finished when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. The continuation of the added state is notified.

  As described above, when the gaming state is RT2 and the control state related to ART is the added state, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment controls the effect mode by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to the added state effect mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), when the gaming state is a state other than RT2 even though the control state related to ART is not shifted from the added state to ART, in the added state. In a period in which the gaming state is shifted from RT2 to RT0 or RT1 due to a mistaken operation procedure by the player and the gaming state is controlled to return to RT2, an effect mode by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like Can be recognized as an added state, and can be recognized as an added state different from the normal added state where the gaming state is RT2. In this example, a plus state on the liquid crystal display 51, and controls the) to display a message indicating that prepare promoted again RT2.

  The main control unit 41 executes an internal lottery (second lottery) based on RT2 when the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT2 and the control state related to ART is an added state, When starting, an internal winning command and a second lottery-related command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and if the extra lottery is performed according to the result of the internal winning (second lottery), the result of the extra lottery Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 performs the extra lottery when it is specified that the extra lottery has been performed based on the ART lottery result command when the control state regarding the ART is the extra state. The effect of suggesting the possibility of adding is executed. In the additional possibility suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 43A, the liquid crystal display 51 is made to display an image (in this embodiment, a character “chance !!”) that suggests the possibility of an additional lottery.

  Thereafter, the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that the main control unit 41 performs the internal lottery result and the results shown in FIGS. Control is performed such that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped in a stop mode according to the stop operation.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c), when the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won in the second lottery, the main control unit 41 does not win any combination in the internal lottery. Each reel is controlled to stop so that the gap is stopped without stopping any combination of symbols in the winning line LN. On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes an extra suggestion effect that suggests an extra lottery result in the game. In the additional suggestion effect, notification mode 2 (in this example, “+ 100G” and “+ 300G” indicating the additional number of ART games is displayed in the same manner as when the red 7-match replay and blue 7-match replay are missed. By controlling the display mode), the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the result of the extra lottery. The number of extra games specified based on the ART lottery result command received at the start of the game is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the result of the extra lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), when the replay GR 23 is won as a predetermined combination in the second lottery, the main control unit 41, together with the game state command and the ART state command, at the predetermined time A second lottery-related command that can specify that the winning combination (replay GR23) is won is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 specifies that the gaming state is not RT2 and the control state related to ART is the added state based on the gaming state command and the ART state command, When it is specified that a predetermined combination (replay GR23) is won based on the command, a false addition suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 44 (a), in the false extra suggestion effect, an image similar to the extra suggestion effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest the possibility that an extra lottery will be performed.

  Thereafter, the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that the main control unit 41 stops the symbol that becomes a discontinuity on the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 44 (b). Stop and control each reel. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display an image indicating that the extra lottery has not been performed when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the main control unit 41 is promoted as a predetermined combination in the second lottery when the control state related to ART is the added state, but the game state is a game state other than RT2. When the replay is won, at the start of the game, a second lottery-related command that can specify that the predetermined combination (promotion replay) is won is sent to the sub-control unit 91 together with the game state command and the ART state command. To send. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 determines that, based on the gaming state command and the ART state command, the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT2, and the control state related to ART is an additional state. In the case where it is determined that the predetermined mode (promotion replay) has been won based on the second lottery related command, in which the control mode is controlled so that the display mode by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like is in an added state. The end possibility suggestion effect is executed. In the end possibility suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image (in the present embodiment, “pinch!” Character) that indicates the possibility that the control of the added state is ended. To display.

  Thereafter, the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that the main control unit 41 stops the symbol that becomes a discontinuity on the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45 (b). Stop and control each reel. On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub control unit 91 executes the added state end notification effect in the same manner as when the promotion replay wins when the gaming state is RT2. Then, an image indicating that the control of the added state is ended is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the end of the added state.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the ART control state is the added state based on the ART state command, and that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT2 based on the gaming state command. When specified, when it is specified that the normal replay was won in the second lottery based on the second lottery-related command, if the lottery is executed and the lottery is won, false termination is possible Perform sex suggestion production. In the false end possibility suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), an image similar to the end possibility suggestion effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest the possibility that the control of the added state is ended. To do.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), when the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the main control unit 41 stops the symbol that becomes a discontinuity on the winning line LN. Stop and control each reel. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 is an image that suggests that when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the control of the added state is continued without being terminated (in this embodiment, “ “End avoidance!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the continuation of the added state.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can specify whether or not the replay GR 23 or the promoted replay is won as a predetermined combination in the second lottery performed again based on the first gaming state (RT2). The second lottery-related command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The second lottery-related command includes information that can specify whether or not the predetermined combination has been won in the second lottery. For example, it may include information indicating the winning or non-winning of the predetermined role in the second lottery, or the winning number as the lottery result of the second lottery as in the internal winning command. It may be included. In the configuration in which the winning number is included as the lottery result of the second lottery as in the internal winning command, as in the second internal winning command, the role other than the predetermined role, particularly the push order bell and the push order replay. By making it impossible to specify an operation mode advantageous to the player, the sub control unit 91 side specifies an operation mode advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result from the second lottery-related command. There is nothing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is in a state where the control state related to ART is in an added state, and when a promotion replay that triggers the end of the added state is won as a predetermined role in the second lottery, A second lottery-related command that can specify that the promotion replay has been won is transmitted, and the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the promotion replay has been won in the second lottery based on the second lottery-related command during the extra state In this case, the added state end notification effect is executed. However, as the second lottery-related command, a command including information that can specify that the added state is ended may be transmitted. In such a configuration, the second lottery-related command may be configured to include information directly indicating the end of the added state as information that can specify that the added state is to be ended, or an internal lottery (internal Including information on the control state relating to ART updated according to the lottery result of the lottery and the second lottery), and including information capable of specifying that the added state has been completed based on the history of the information over a plurality of games It may be a configuration.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment controls the game state (RT0, RT2) in which the winning probability of the AT that notifies the player of the pushing order advantageous to the player and the re-gamer (normal replay, push order replay) is higher than normal. It is possible to control to the added state that is controlled by ART and both AT and RT2 that can be controlled by both AT and RT0, and in the added state, it can be selected only in this added state. This is a configuration in which the number of games controlled by ART is added when a re-playing combination (red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay, missed replay a) is won.

  In such a configuration, during the period in which both the AT and the predetermined RT are controlled, by performing the operation in accordance with the notified push order, the end condition of the period for controlling both the AT and the predetermined RT is established. On the other hand, if the player operates in a pushing order different from the notified pushing order, the end condition of the period for controlling both the AT and the predetermined RT is established. If the configuration is such that the predetermined RT ends even if not, not only the predetermined RT will end, but also the special re-gamer will not be a lottery target due to the end of the predetermined RT, and will not be won For this reason, the opportunity to add the number of games controlled by ART will be lost, and there is a possibility that the disadvantage for the player will be remarkably increased.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has the same probability that a predetermined combination (small combination) wins, but a specific combination (red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay, missing replay a) Control to a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state with different probabilities of winning, and each predetermined with a probability determined according to the gaming state at the start of the game Performing an internal lottery to determine whether or not a winning combination is permitted, controlling to an added state as specific control, and ART as an advantageous benefit to the player when controlling to the added state as specific control The number of games can be added, and when the game is controlled to the added state as the specific control and is controlled to the second gaming state (RT0, RT1) at the start of the game, 1 game When the second lottery can be performed again based on the state (RT2), the added state control is performed as specific control, and the first gaming state (RT2) is controlled at the start of the game The number of ART games is given based on the fact that a specific role is won in the internal lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2), the added state is controlled as specific control, and the game In the case of controlling to the second gaming state (RT0 or RT1) at the start, regardless of whether or not a predetermined combination (small role, etc.) is won in the internal lottery based on the second gaming state, The second lottery is performed based on the first gaming state (RT2), and the number of ART games is given based on the fact that a specific combination is won in the second lottery, so the control of the added state is executed. But in a gaming state other than RT2 Even if it is controlled, an additional number of ART games will be given based on the fact that a specific role is won in the second lottery when the gaming state is set to RT2. Regardless of whether it is controlled in the gaming state or the second gaming state, the decision regarding the addition of the ART game as a privilege is made under the same conditions, and the player's profit changes greatly Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1) at the start of the game, the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game is Regardless of whether or not it is a predetermined role (small role, etc.) that has the same probability of being determined whether it is the first gaming state (RT2) or the second gaming state (RT0, RT1). Since the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2) is performed, when the gaming state at the start of the game is the second gaming state, when the second lottery based on the first gaming state is performed, Since it is not necessary to consider the lottery result of the lottery, the program capacity when performing the second lottery based on the first gaming state can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the added state as the specific control and controls the first gaming state (RT2) at the start of the game. In the internal lottery based on the game state (RT2), the number of ART games is given based on the fact that a specific role is won, while the added state control is performed as specific control, and at the start of the game In the case of controlling to the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), a second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2) is performed, and a specific role is won in the second lottery. Based on the configuration, the number of ART games is given based on the above. When the added state control is performed as the specific control, either the first gaming state (RT2) or the second gaming state (RT0, RT1) Whether or not Performing a second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2), specific role in the second drawing may be configured to impart a game number of ART Based upon the elected. Even in such a configuration, the control of the added state is executed, but if the control is performed in the second game state (RT0, RT1) other than the first game state (RT2), When the state is set to the first gaming state (RT2), an additional number of ART games is given based on the fact that a specific combination is won in the second lottery, so the first gaming state is controlled. Regardless of whether the game is being controlled or controlled in the second gaming state, it is possible to make a decision regarding the addition of an ART game as a privilege under the same conditions, and to prevent the player's profit from changing significantly. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, based on the fact that a specific combination is won in the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2) when controlling to the added state as the specific control, It is a configuration that gives an additional number of ART games as a privilege advantageous to the player, that is, a configuration that gives a period controlled to an advantageous state as a privilege advantageous to the player. The right that allows the player to move to an advantageous state (winning a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advantageous state, allowing winnings to move to the advantageous state, etc.), for the player The right to be notified of an advantageous operation mode, the right to be controlled to a gaming state having a high expected value to which a gaming value is given, and whether or not the current gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player Benefits that are directly advantageous to the player, such as the right to be played, etc., and are not directly advantageous to the player, but may be a condition for obtaining a privilege on the Internet. It may be an indirectly advantageous benefit. Further, the length (number of games) of the period controlled to the advantageous state given as a privilege advantageous to the player may vary depending on the result of a predetermined lottery or the like, or the fixed game The average value of the number of games and the number of games that vary depending on the end condition may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the first gaming state (RT2), a predetermined re-playing role (red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay, missed replay a) is selected as a lottery target, In the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), the predetermined re-playing combination is not subject to the lottery, so that the first gaming state and the second gaming state are the predetermined re-playing combination (red 7 matches). The replay, the blue 7-match replay, and the missed replay a) are configured to have a game state with different probabilities of winning, but the first game state and the second game state have a predetermined re-playing role (red 7-match replay). As long as the blue 7-match replay and missed replay a) have different probabilities of winning, a predetermined re-playing player will be selected in both the first game state and the second game state, and the predetermined replay The gamer Probability to be selected may be different configuration.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to give the number of ART games based on the fact that a specific combination is won in the second lottery, and a specific re-playing combination (red 7 replays, blue 7 replays, missed replays a) are applied, but the specific role to which a privilege is granted by winning in the second lottery is not limited to the replaying role, It may be a small combination accompanied by a medal payout, or a combination of predetermined symbols not accompanied by a medal payout or a re-playing game combination, for example, a transition outcome.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in the added state, and the replay GRs 21 and 22 are elected as specific roles in the internal lottery or the second lottery based on RT2, and as a privilege, Although it is the structure which gives the addition of the number of games, based on the fact that the specific winning combination is won as a winning combination by performing a stop operation in a predetermined operation mode, The structure which gives the addition of the number of games may be sufficient, As such a structure, the main control part 41 is controlling to the addition state, and the game state at the time of a game start is 1st game state (RT2). Yes, a special combination is won in the internal lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2), and a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, so that a special combination is won based on the prize winning. While adding the number of ART games, the gaming state at the start of the game is the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), and a specific role is played in the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2). In the case of winning, when all reels are stopped, even if the game is configured to give an additional number of ART games as a benefit based on the stop operation being performed in a predetermined operation mode, It is possible to prevent the person's profit from changing greatly.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in the added state as the specific control, and when a specific combination is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery, the number of ART games is always given as a privilege. However, it may be a configuration in which the number of ART games is given as a privilege when a specific combination is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Whether to grant an additional number of ART games as a benefit based on the fact that a specific role has been won in the lottery or the second lottery, or that a stop operation has been performed in the order of stop corresponding to the specific role A lottery to determine whether or not to give the number of games, etc., and a configuration in which the number of ART games won in the lottery is given as a privilege, or a specific role is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery Every time Equal a predetermined number of points assigned depending on the sum of the point it may be configured such that imparts plus the number of games the ART as a benefit by reaching a predetermined number.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the second lottery with the gaming state being RT2 when the gaming state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game. In the same manner as above, according to the game state, it is determined whether or not all the lottery target roles including a specific combination are won, and the winning number of the combination determined to be won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. However, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not only a specific combination is won in the second lottery with the gaming state being RT2, and if the winning combination is determined for a specific combination, As the configuration for setting the winning information that can identify the type of the combination in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the winning combination control may be configured to specify the winning of the specific combination based on the winning information. By setting it as such a structure, the load of the main control part 41 in the case of determination of a specific combination can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, regardless of whether or not the main lottery-related process is controlled to the added state. The game state is set to RT2 and the second lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific winning combination has been won, but it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the added state and is controlled to the added state. If it is determined and the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, the second lottery may be performed with the game state set to RT2. By setting it as such a structure, the load of the main control part 41 in the state which is not controlled to the addition state can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the added state is applied as the specific control performed by the main control unit 41, and the main control unit 41 is configured when the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game. When the second lottery is performed as RT2 and the additional control is performed as the specific control, the number of games of ART is added as a privilege based on the fact that a specific role is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery. However, in the configuration in which the winning probabilities of specific roles for which a privilege is to be granted during ART are different between RT0 and RT1 (including a configuration in which only one is won), the main control unit 41 The configuration may be such that ART control is applied as the specific control to be performed, and in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 has an RT whose gaming state is controlled by ART at the start of the game. In the case of RT1 other than the above, the second lottery based on the winning probability of RT0 is performed, and when the ART is controlled as the specific control, based on the fact that a specific role is won in the second lottery, As described above, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from changing greatly by controlling the added state or adding an additional number of ART games.

  In the main lottery process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment acquires a gaming state at the start of the game, sets the acquired gaming state as a gaming state for internal lottery, and executes the internal lottery process. The internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game can be performed. After the internal lottery, the first gaming state (RT2) is set to the gaming state for internal lottery and the internal lottery process is performed. By executing, the second lottery based on the first gaming state is performed, and the lottery result is determined using the internal lottery process common to the process of performing the internal lottery and the process of performing the second lottery. Therefore, the program capacity when performing the second lottery based on the first gaming state can be reduced.

  In the main lottery process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs a process for performing the internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game, and then performs a process for performing the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2). After executing the internal lottery process, the lottery result by the internal lottery is backed up in a predetermined separate area other than the winning number area of the RAM 41c, Then, since the process which performs a 2nd lottery is performed, in performing the process which performs a 2nd lottery, it can prevent that the lottery result by an internal lottery is impaired.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a gaming state that is the first gaming state (RT2) at the start of the game, and a specific combination (seven reds are aligned) in an internal lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2). When Replay, Blue 7 Match Replay, Missed Replay a) is selected, it stops in a specific mode of operation (stopping order of right, middle and left, red 7 Match Replay, blue 7 Match Replay can be stopped on the winning line LN) When an operation is performed, control is performed to stop a specific symbol combination (a combination of red 7-match replay and blue 7-match replay) on the winning line LN, and an operation mode other than the specific operation mode (for example, left When the first stop order, right middle left stop order and red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay are operated in the winning line LN), the symbols other than the specific symbol combination are operated. When the combination (the combination of missed replay a and middle replay symbols) is controlled to stop the winning line LN and the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a specific role when controlling to the first gaming state When a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, a specific symbol combination (a combination of red 7-match replay and blue 7-match replay) is stopped on the winning line at LN, and the sub-control unit 91 The display of the liquid crystal display 51 is used as a notification mode 1, and an image indicating that specific control is being performed and a privilege is given is displayed to notify the grant of the privilege. When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a specific role in the state, the display of the liquid crystal display 51 by the sub-control unit 91 is notified By notifying the provision of the privilege as a notification mode 2 different from 1, it is notified that the privilege is granted in a different mode from when the combination of specific symbols is stopped, and the game at the start of the game When the state is the second gaming state and the lottery result of the second lottery becomes a specific role, when the stop operation is performed, the display of the liquid crystal display 51 by the sub-control unit 91 is notified. When the second game state (RT0, RT1) is controlled and a specific winning combination is won in the second lottery, the control is controlled to the first game state. When a specific combination is won in the internal lottery, a stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode, that is, a specific symbol combination (red 7-match replay, blue 7-match replay Combination) can be stopped Since it is informed that the privilege is granted in the same mode (notification mode 2) as when there was not, the privilege is obtained by winning a specific role in the second lottery in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1). Even when the game is given, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment controls to the added state as the specific control, and can perform navigation notification according to the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the game state at the start of the game. When the state control is executed and the game state is the first game state (RT2), the navigation notification is given when the push order bell and the replays GR21 to 23 are won in the internal lottery. When the gaming state is the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), the push order bell and push order replay in the internal lottery (replay GR11-16 when RT0, replay GR1 when RT1 -6) is designed to perform navigation notification when winning, and the lottery result for which navigation notification is performed differs depending on whether the first gaming state or the second gaming state. State can be recognized whether the second game state or a first game condition.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the navigation notification of a different aspect is performed with respect to the same alerting | reporting object according to the 1st gaming state or the 2nd gaming state, and even in such a structure, the present gaming state is Whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state can be recognized.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has the same probability of winning a predetermined role (small role), but the first gaming state (RT2) and the first game state having different probabilities of winning a special role (promotional replay). Whether to allow control to a plurality of gaming states including two gaming states (RT0, RT1), and to win a prize for each predetermined role with a predetermined probability according to the gaming state at the start of the game The internal lottery to determine whether or not, it is a configuration that can be controlled to an added state where the number of ART games is added when a predetermined condition is established as specific control, If the first game state (RT2) or the second game state (RT0, RT1) is controlled at the start of the game, the second lottery is performed again based on the first game state (RT2). Is possible and If the added state control is performed as a constant control and the control is in the first gaming state (RT2) at the start of the game, a special is made in the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2). The specific control is terminated based on the winning of the winning combination, the added state control is performed as the specific control, and the game is controlled to the second gaming state (RT0 or RT1) at the start of the game. Since the second lottery is performed based on the first gaming state (RT2) and the specific control is terminated based on the fact that the special combination is won in the second lottery, the control of the added state is executed. However, even if it is controlled to the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), which has a different probability of winning the special combination from the first gaming state (RT2), the first game is not performed by the second lottery. Special with probability in state (RT2) The winning combination is determined, and the specific control is terminated based on the winning of the special winning combination. Therefore, the winning combination is controlled to the first gaming state or the second gaming state. It is possible to prevent the player's profit from changing greatly depending on whether or not

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the added state as the specific control and also controls the second gaming state when the first gaming state (RT2) is controlled at the start of the game. Even when the gaming state (RT0, RT1) is controlled, the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2) is performed again, and based on the fact that a special role is won in the second lottery. The specific control is ended. However, when the control is performed in the added state as the specific control and is controlled to the first gaming state (RT2) at the start of the game, the first gaming state ( Without performing the second lottery again based on RT2), the specific control is terminated based on the fact that a special role is won in the internal lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2) at the start of the game Control the added state as control And the second game state (RT0, RT1) is controlled at the start of the game, the second lottery is performed again based on the first game state (RT2), and the second lottery is selected. The specific control may be terminated based on the fact that the special combination is won. Even in such a configuration, the control of the added state is executed, but if the control is performed in the second game state (RT0, RT1) other than the first game state (RT2), Since the specific control is ended based on the fact that the special combination is won in the second lottery when the state is the first gaming state (RT2), whether the state is controlled to the first gaming state, Regardless of whether or not the game state is controlled in the second gaming state, the specific control can be ended under the same conditions, and it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from changing greatly due to the fluctuation of the specific control period.

  In the present embodiment, in the first gaming state (RT2), a predetermined re-playing role (promotional replay) is selected as a special role in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1). Since the predetermined re-playing role is not subject to the lottery, the first game state and the second game state have different probabilities that the predetermined re-playing role (promotion replay) will be won as a special role. The first gaming state and the second gaming state may have different probabilities of winning a predetermined re-gamer (promotional replay), and even in the first gaming state. Even in the second gaming state, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined re-playing role becomes a lottery target as a special role, and the probability that the predetermined re-playing role is won is different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to end the specific control based on the fact that a special combination is won in the second lottery, and a predetermined replay combination (promotion replay) as the specific combination. However, the special role whose specific control will be ended by winning in the second lottery is not limited to the re-playing role, but a small role with a medal payout or a medal payout. Or a combination of predetermined symbols that does not accompany the re-playing role, such as a transitional outcome.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in the added state, and the enhanced replay is won as a special role in the internal lottery or the second lottery based on RT2, and the added state as the specific control However, even if it is configured to end the added state based on the fact that the special role has been won, as a role to win the special role by performing a stop operation in a predetermined operation mode. Well, as such a configuration, the main control unit 41 controls the added state, the gaming state at the start of the game is the first gaming state (RT2), and the first gaming state (RT2) A special role is won in the internal lottery based on the winning probability, and the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, so that the extra state is terminated based on the winning of the special role, while the game at the start of the game If the state is the second gaming state (RT0, RT1) and a special combination is won in the second lottery based on the winning probability of the first gaming state (RT2), all reels are stopped In this case, even when the added state is terminated based on the stop operation being performed in a predetermined operation mode, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from changing greatly.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the second lottery with the gaming state being RT2 when the gaming state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, and in the second lottery, the internal lottery is performed. In the same manner as in the above, according to the gaming state, it is determined whether or not all the lottery targets including a special combination are won, and the winning number of the combination determined to be won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. However, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not only a special combination is won when the game state is RT2 and the second lottery is performed. As the configuration for setting the winning information that can identify the type of the winning combination in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is possible to determine the winning of the special winning combination based on the winning information in the control of the added state. By setting it as such a structure, the load of the main control part 41 at the time of determination of a special combination can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, regardless of whether or not the main lottery-related process is controlled to the added state. The game state is set to RT2 and the second lottery is performed to determine whether or not a special combination is won. However, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the added state, and the added state is controlled. If it is determined and the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, the second lottery may be performed with the game state set to RT2. By setting it as such a structure, the load of the main control part 41 in the state which is not controlled to the addition state can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the added state is applied as the specific control performed by the main control unit 41, and the main control unit 41 is configured when the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game. Is configured to end the control of the added state based on the fact that a special combination is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery when the second lottery is performed as RT2 and the additional state is controlled as the specific control However, in the configuration where the winning probabilities of special roles that will end the ART are different between RT0 and RT1 (including the configuration in which only one is won), the ART control is performed as the specific control performed by the main control unit 41. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured when the game state is RT1 other than RT0 controlled by ART at the start of the game. When the second lottery based on the winning probability of RT0 is performed and the ART is controlled as the specific control, the control of the ART is terminated based on the fact that a special role is won in the second lottery. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's profit from changing greatly.

  In the present embodiment, the first gaming state (RT2) and the second gaming state (RT0, RT1) have the same probability of winning a predetermined combination (small role, etc.), and the main control unit 41 Regardless of whether or not a predetermined combination is won in the internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game, the first gaming state is controlled in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1). Based on (RT2), the second lottery is performed again, and it is determined whether or not the special role winning the lottery is won with a probability corresponding to the first gaming state (RT2). Therefore, the second gaming state (RT0, RT1 ), It is not necessary to consider the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game when performing the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2). Can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a gaming state that is the first gaming state (RT2) at the start of the game, and has a special role (promotion replay) in an internal lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2). Is selected, when the stop operation is performed, a special combination of symbols (promotional replay symbol combination) is controlled to stop at the winning line LN, and the sub-control unit 91 notifies the end of the added state. The effect is executed and the effect mode is set as the end notification mode, and an image indicating that the specific control is ended is displayed to notify the end of the specific control, while the game state is the second game state ( RT0, RT1), the game state is changed to the first gaming state (RT2), the internal lottery is performed again, and a special combination (promotion replay) is won. 1 is executed to display the image indicating that the specific control is ended and the end of the specific control is displayed with the effect mode as the end notification mode. Thus, the second gaming state (RT0 , RT1), when a special combination is won in the second lottery based on the first gaming state, the first gaming state is controlled, and the special combination is played in the internal lottery. When a stop operation is performed at the time of winning, that is, when a special symbol combination (combination of promotion replay symbols) is stopped, it is notified that the specific control is ended in a common end notification mode. In the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), even when the specific control is terminated due to the special result of the lottery result of the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2), the player feels uncomfortable Reduce That.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery, the promotion replay, which is a special role that triggers the end of the added state as the specific control, is one type of role, and when the promotion replay is won, the promotion replay is always performed. However, for example, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the first ending combination suggesting the end of the added state and the first ending combination cannot be awarded, as a special combination. A second end combination that can be allowed to be executed, and in the first gaming state (RT2), a special result that the first end combination and the second end combination as a special combination win simultaneously It is possible, and when the special result is won by internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a special operation mode (a timing at which the first ending combination can be stopped on the winning line LN), the first ending combination is Winning line L When the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the special operation mode (a timing at which the first end combination cannot be stopped on the winning line LN), the second end combination is stopped on the winning line LN. When the special result is won by the internal lottery in the first gaming state (RT2) and the stop operation is performed in a special operation mode, the first ending combination is set to LN on the winning line. In addition to being stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes an added state end notification effect to notify the end of the specific control (added state) as the end notification mode 1 as an effect mode, and the first gaming state ( When a special operation result is won by internal lottery in RT2) and the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the special operation mode, the sub-control unit 91 executes an extra state end notification effect. In an aspect different from when the first end combination is stopped by notifying the end of the specific control (additional state) as an end notification mode 2 of a mode different from the end notification mode 1. When the special control (additional state) is notified and the special result is won by the second lottery in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), the sub-control unit 91 performs the stop operation when the stop operation is performed. The added state end notification effect is executed to change the effect mode to the end notification mode 2, that is, the special result is won by the internal lottery in the first gaming state (RT2), and the first end combination is missed and the second end combination is lost. Since the fact that the specific control (additional state) will be completed is notified in the same manner as when winning a prize, the special result was won in the second lottery in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1). Even when the constant control (additional state) ends, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a range distribution for each gaming state 0 to 2 with respect to the determination value of each lottery target combination used in the internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the range of determination values (52421 to 58420) in which the winning of the push order replay (replay GR11 to 16) is determined at RT0 is arranged within the range of deviation (26231 to 65536) at RT1. At the same time, it is arranged within a range of determination values (17261 to 58420) in which the winning of normal replay is determined in RT2. In addition, the range of determination values (52421 to 58420) for determining whether or not the push order replay (replay GR21 to 23) is won in RT2 is arranged in the range of deviation (26231 to 65536) in RT1, and the deviation in RT0. In the range (58421 to 66536). In addition, the range of determination values (62837 to 65536) in which the winning of the promotion replay is determined in RT2 is arranged within the range of deviation (262231 to 65536) in RT1, and the range of deviation in RT0 (58421 to 66536). Is placed inside.

  As described above, the determination value of the internal lottery of the promotion replay whose game state is shifted by winning at RT2 is the push order including the promotion replay whose game state is transferred when winning at RT1. Push order replay (replay) including special replay and fall replay that is set to a range that does not overlap with the range of judgment values of replay (replay GR1 to 6) and that wins at RT0. GR11 to 16) are set to a range that does not overlap with the range of determination values.

  By placing the range of the promotion replay determination value in RT2 different from the range of the combination determination value accompanying the transition of the game state in RT1 and RT0, the promotion replay is won again in the second lottery with the game state set to RT2. In this case, in the internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game, both the roles with the transition of the gaming state in RT1 and RT0 are no longer won, and the gaming state only according to the promotion replay being won in the second lottery Can be shifted to RT0, and the control state related to ART can be shifted to ART.

  In addition, the internal lottery determination value of push order replay (replay GR21 to 22), which will be given an additional number of ART games as a benefit advantageous to the player by winning at RT2, wins at RT1. The game state is set so that it does not overlap with the judgment value range of the push order replay (replay GR1-6) including the promoted replay that will be transferred, and the game is won by winning at RT0. It is set to a range that does not overlap with the judgment value range of push order replay (replay GR11-16) including special replay and falling replay that will be transitioned, and the gaming state transitions by winning at RT2 Is set to a deviation range so that it does not overlap with the judgment value range for promotion replay .

  By placing the range of the judgment value of the push order replay (replay GR21, 22) in RT2 in the out-of-range range in RT1, RT0, the push state replay (replay GR21, 22) in the second lottery again with the gaming state as RT2. Are won in the internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game, neither the small role or the replaying role in RT1 and RT0 will be won, and the push replay in the second lottery (replay GR21, 22) Since the control relating to the extra lottery can be performed only in accordance with the fact that is won, the control relating to the extra state can be simplified.

  In addition, by placing the range of the determination value of the push order replay (replay GR21, 22) in RT2 in the range of deviation in RT1, RT0, the push state replay (replay GR21, 22), in the internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game, both the push order bell and push order replay in RT1 and RT0 are no longer won, and the push order replay (replay GR21 in the second lottery) 22), the notification of the stop order to be notified by the sub-control unit 91 overlaps with the notification of the push order navigation or the like based on the winning of the push order bell or another push order replay. It is possible to prevent the contents of the notification from becoming difficult to understand or inconsistencies in the content of the notification.

  As mentioned above, although the Example and modification of this invention were demonstrated with drawing, this invention is not limited to this Example, Even if there is a change and addition in the range which does not deviate from the main point of this invention, this invention. Needless to say, it is included in

  In the above-described embodiment and modification, the example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which bets are set using medals and credits as game values has been described. However, bets using game balls as game values are calculated. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine to be set or a fully credit type slot machine in which a bet amount is set by using only credit as a game value. When using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when 3 is set as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls when a winning occurs. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out all of utility values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other gaming machines are also described. Is a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by launching a game ball in the game area, for example, a reel having a plurality of types of identification information arranged on the outer periphery, and a transparent liquid crystal display, etc. The control related to the transmissive display device described in the above embodiment can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine in which the transmissive display device is provided on the front side (player side) of the reel. There is an effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other gaming machines are also described. This is a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game by launching a game ball into the game area, and includes, for example, a reel having a light emitting device that can irradiate a plurality of types of identification information arranged on the outer periphery from the back side. A transmissive display device such as a transmissive liquid crystal display is provided on the front side (player side) of the reel, and the light emitting device of the reel also functions as the backlight of the transmissive display device. The control related to the reel LED described in the embodiment can be applied, and the same function and effect can be obtained in this case.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
In the slot machine that can derive the display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and can win according to the display result,
Lottery state control means capable of controlling a plurality of types of lottery states including a first lottery state and a second lottery state;
Lottery means for determining a lottery result with a probability corresponding to the type of lottery state;
Specific control execution means for executing specific control;
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific control is being executed;
With
The first lottery state and the second lottery state have the same probability that the predetermined lottery result is determined, but the probability that the specific lottery result is determined is different.
The privilege granting unit grants the privilege based on the fact that specific control is being performed and the lottery result of the lottery unit is the specific lottery result in the first lottery state,
The slot machine further includes re-lottery means for determining a lottery result with a probability corresponding to the first lottery state in the second lottery state,
The privilege granting means, when specific control is executed and controlled to the second lottery state, the privilege is given based on the fact that the lottery result of the re-lottery means is the specific lottery result. Grant,
If the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result, the re-lottery means will determine the lottery result with a probability corresponding to the first lottery state when controlled to the second lottery state. Determine the slot machine.

Images